]> code.delx.au - gnu-emacs/blob - doc/misc/cc-mode.texi
Merge from origin/emacs-25
[gnu-emacs] / doc / misc / cc-mode.texi
1 \input texinfo
2 @c Notes to self regarding line handling:
3 @c
4 @c Empty lines are often significant before @end directives; avoid them.
5 @c
6 @c Empty lines before and after @example directives are significant in
7 @c info output but not in TeX. Empty lines inside @example directives
8 @c are significant.
9
10 @c Conventions for formatting examples:
11 @c o If the example contains empty lines then put the surrounding empty
12 @c lines inside the @example directives. Put them outside otherwise.
13 @c o Use @group inside the example only if it shows indentation where
14 @c the relation between lines inside is relevant.
15 @c o Format line number columns like this:
16 @c 1: foo
17 @c 2: bar
18 @c ^ one space
19 @c ^^ two columns, right alignment
20 @c o Check line lengths in TeX output; they can typically be no longer
21 @c than 70 chars, 60 if the paragraph is indented.
22
23 @comment TBD: Document the finer details of statement anchoring?
24
25 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
26 @comment %**start of header (This is for running Texinfo on a region)
27 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
28
29
30 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
31 @comment How to make the various output formats:
32 @comment (Thanks to Robert Chassell for supplying this information.)
33 @comment Note that Texinfo 4.7 (or later) is needed.
34 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
35 @ignore
36 In each of the following pairs of commands, the first generates a
37 version with cross references pointing to the GNU Emacs manuals,
38 the second with them pointing to the XEmacs manuals.
39 ## Info output
40 makeinfo cc-mode.texi
41 makeinfo -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi
42
43 ## DVI output
44 ## You may need to set up the environment variable TEXINPUTS so
45 ## that tex can find the file texinfo.tex - See the tex
46 ## manpage.
47 texi2dvi cc-mode.texi
48 texi2dvi -t "@set XEMACS " cc-mode.texi
49
50 ## HTML output. (The --no-split parameter is optional)
51 makeinfo --html --no-split cc-mode.texi
52 makeinfo --html --no-split -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi
53
54 ## Plain text output
55 makeinfo --fill-column=70 --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
56 --no-headers --output=cc-mode.txt cc-mode.texi
57 makeinfo --fill-column=70 --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
58 --no-headers --output=cc-mode.txt -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi
59
60 ## DocBook output
61 makeinfo --docbook --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
62 cc-mode.texi
63 makeinfo --docbook --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
64 -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi
65
66 ## XML output
67 makeinfo --xml --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
68 cc-mode.texi
69 makeinfo --xml --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
70 -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi
71
72 #### (You must be in the same directory as the viewed file.)
73
74 ## View DVI output
75 xdvi cc-mode.dvi &
76
77 ## View HTML output
78 mozilla cc-mode.html
79 @end ignore
80
81 @comment No overfull hbox marks in the dvi file.
82 @finalout
83
84 @setfilename ../../info/ccmode.info
85 @settitle CC Mode Manual
86 @include docstyle.texi
87 @footnotestyle end
88
89 @c The following four macros generate the filenames and titles of the
90 @c main (X)Emacs manual and the Elisp/Lispref manual. Leave the
91 @c Texinfo variable 'XEMACS' unset to generate a GNU Emacs version, set it
92 @c to generate an XEmacs version, e.g., with
93 @c "makeinfo -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi".
94 @ifset XEMACS
95 @macro emacsman
96 xemacs
97 @end macro
98 @macro emacsmantitle
99 XEmacs User's Manual
100 @end macro
101 @macro lispref
102 lispref
103 @end macro
104 @macro lispreftitle
105 XEmacs Lisp Reference Manual
106 @end macro
107 @end ifset
108
109 @ifclear XEMACS
110 @macro emacsman
111 emacs
112 @end macro
113 @macro emacsmantitle
114 GNU Emacs Manual
115 @end macro
116 @macro lispref
117 elisp
118 @end macro
119 @macro lispreftitle
120 GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual
121 @end macro
122 @end ifclear
123
124
125 @macro ccmode
126 CC Mode
127 @end macro
128
129 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
130 @comment @setchapternewpage odd !! we don't want blank pages !!
131 @comment %**end of header (This is for running Texinfo on a region)
132 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
133
134
135 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
136 @comment
137 @comment Texinfo manual for CC Mode
138 @comment Generated from the original README file by Krishna Padmasola
139 @comment <krishna@earth-gw.njit.edu>
140 @comment
141 @comment Authors:
142 @comment Barry A. Warsaw
143 @comment Martin Stjernholm
144 @comment Alan Mackenzie
145 @comment
146 @comment Maintained by Martin Stjernholm and Alan Mackenzie <bug-cc-mode@gnu.org>
147 @comment
148 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
149
150 @comment Define an index for syntactic symbols.
151 @defindex ss
152
153 @comment Combine key, syntactic symbol and concept indices into one.
154 @syncodeindex ss cp
155 @syncodeindex ky cp
156
157 @copying
158 This manual is for CC Mode in Emacs.
159
160 Copyright @copyright{} 1995--2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
161
162 @quotation
163 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
164 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or
165 any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no
166 Invariant Sections, with the Front-Cover Texts being ``A GNU Manual'',
167 and with the Back-Cover Texts as in (a) below. A copy of the license
168 is included in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
169
170 (a) The FSF's Back-Cover Text is: ``You have the freedom to copy and
171 modify this GNU manual.''
172 @end quotation
173 @end copying
174
175 @comment Info directory entry for use by install-info. The indentation
176 @comment here is by request from the FSF folks.
177 @dircategory Emacs editing modes
178 @direntry
179 * CC Mode: (ccmode). Emacs mode for editing C, C++, Objective-C,
180 Java, Pike, AWK, and CORBA IDL code.
181 @end direntry
182
183 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
184 @comment TeX title page
185 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
186
187 @titlepage
188 @sp 10
189
190 @center @titlefont{CC Mode 5.32}
191 @sp 2
192 @center A GNU Emacs mode for editing C and C-like languages
193 @sp 2
194 @center Barry A. Warsaw, Martin Stjernholm, Alan Mackenzie
195
196 @page
197 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
198 @insertcopying
199
200 This manual was generated from cc-mode.texi, which is distributed with Emacs,
201 or can be downloaded from @url{http://savannah.gnu.org/projects/emacs/}.
202 @end titlepage
203
204 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
205 @comment The Top node contains the master menu for the Info file.
206 @comment This appears only in the Info file, not the printed manual.
207 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
208
209 @summarycontents
210 @contents
211
212 @node Top, Introduction, (dir), (dir)
213 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
214
215 @ifnottex
216 @top @ccmode{}
217
218 @ccmode{} is a GNU Emacs mode for editing files containing C, C++,
219 Objective-C, Java, CORBA IDL (and the variants PSDL and CIDL), Pike
220 and AWK code. It provides syntax-based indentation, font locking, and
221 has several handy commands and some minor modes to make the editing
222 easier. It does not provide tools to look up and navigate between
223 functions, classes, etc.; there are other packages for that.
224
225 @insertcopying
226 @end ifnottex
227
228 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
229 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
230
231 @menu
232 * Introduction::
233 * Overview::
234 * Getting Started::
235 * Commands::
236 * Font Locking::
237 * Config Basics::
238 * Custom Filling and Breaking::
239 * Custom Auto-newlines::
240 * Clean-ups::
241 * Indentation Engine Basics::
242 * Customizing Indentation::
243 * Custom Macros::
244 * Odds and Ends::
245 * Sample Init File::
246 * Performance Issues::
247 * Limitations and Known Bugs::
248 * FAQ::
249 * Updating CC Mode::
250 * Mailing Lists and Bug Reports::
251 * GNU Free Documentation License::
252 * Command and Function Index::
253 * Variable Index::
254 * Concept and Key Index::
255
256 @detailmenu
257 --- The Detailed Node Listing ---
258
259 Commands
260
261 * Indentation Commands::
262 * Comment Commands::
263 * Movement Commands::
264 * Filling and Breaking::
265 * Minor Modes::
266 * Electric Keys::
267 * Auto-newlines::
268 * Hungry WS Deletion::
269 * Subword Movement::
270 * Other Commands::
271
272 Font Locking
273
274 * Font Locking Preliminaries::
275 * Faces::
276 * Doc Comments::
277 * AWK Mode Font Locking::
278
279 Configuration Basics
280
281 * CC Hooks::
282 * Style Variables::
283 * Styles::
284
285 Styles
286
287 * Built-in Styles::
288 * Choosing a Style::
289 * Adding Styles::
290 * Guessing the Style::
291 * File Styles::
292
293 Customizing Auto-newlines
294
295 * Hanging Braces::
296 * Hanging Colons::
297 * Hanging Semicolons and Commas::
298
299 Hanging Braces
300
301 * Custom Braces::
302
303 Indentation Engine Basics
304
305 * Syntactic Analysis::
306 * Syntactic Symbols::
307 * Indentation Calculation::
308
309 Syntactic Symbols
310
311 * Function Symbols::
312 * Class Symbols::
313 * Conditional Construct Symbols::
314 * Switch Statement Symbols::
315 * Brace List Symbols::
316 * External Scope Symbols::
317 * Paren List Symbols::
318 * Literal Symbols::
319 * Multiline Macro Symbols::
320 * Objective-C Method Symbols::
321 * Java Symbols::
322 * Statement Block Symbols::
323 * K&R Symbols::
324
325 Customizing Indentation
326
327 * c-offsets-alist::
328 * Interactive Customization::
329 * Line-Up Functions::
330 * Custom Line-Up::
331 * Other Indentation::
332
333 Line-Up Functions
334
335 * Brace/Paren Line-Up::
336 * List Line-Up::
337 * Operator Line-Up::
338 * Comment Line-Up::
339 * Misc Line-Up::
340
341
342 Customizing Macros
343
344 * Macro Backslashes::
345 * Macros with ;::
346 * Noise Macros::
347
348 @end detailmenu
349 @end menu
350 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
351 @node Introduction, Overview, Top, Top
352 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
353 @chapter Introduction
354 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
355
356 @cindex BOCM
357 @cindex history
358 @cindex awk-mode.el
359 @cindex c-mode.el
360 @cindex c++-mode.el
361
362 Welcome to @ccmode{}, a GNU Emacs mode for editing files containing C,
363 C++, Objective-C, Java, CORBA IDL (and the variants CORBA PSDL and
364 CIDL), Pike and AWK code. This incarnation of the mode is descended
365 from @file{c-mode.el} (also called ``Boring Old C Mode'' or BOCM
366 @t{:-)}, @file{c++-mode.el} version 2, which Barry Warsaw had been
367 maintaining since 1992, and @file{awk-mode.el}, a long neglected mode
368 in the (X)Emacs base.
369
370 Late in 1997, Martin Stjernholm joined Barry on the @ccmode{}
371 Maintainers Team, and implemented the Pike support. In 2000 Martin
372 took over as the sole maintainer. In 2001 Alan Mackenzie joined the
373 team, implementing AWK support in version 5.30. @ccmode{} did not
374 originally contain the font lock support for its languages; that
375 was added in version 5.30.
376
377 This manual describes @ccmode{}
378 @comment The following line must appear on its own, so that the
379 version 5.32.
380 @comment Release.py script can update the version number automatically
381
382 @ccmode{} supports the editing of C, C++, Objective-C,
383 Java, CORBA's Interface Definition Language, Pike@footnote{A C-like
384 scripting language with its roots in the LPC language used in some MUD
385 engines. See @uref{http://pike.ida.liu.se/}.} and AWK files. In this
386 way, you can easily set up consistent font locking and coding styles for
387 use in editing all of these languages, although AWK is not yet as
388 uniformly integrated as the other languages.
389
390 @findex c-mode
391 @findex c++-mode
392 @findex objc-mode
393 @findex java-mode
394 @findex idl-mode
395 @findex pike-mode
396 @findex awk-mode
397 Note that the name of this package is ``@ccmode{}'', but there is no top
398 level @code{cc-mode} entry point. All of the variables, commands, and
399 functions in @ccmode{} are prefixed with @code{c-@var{thing}}, and
400 @code{c-mode}, @code{c++-mode}, @code{objc-mode}, @code{java-mode},
401 @code{idl-mode}, @code{pike-mode}, and @code{awk-mode} entry points are
402 provided. This package is intended to be a replacement for
403 @file{c-mode.el}, @file{c++-mode.el} and @file{awk-mode.el}.
404
405 A special word of thanks goes to Krishna Padmasola for his work in
406 converting the original @file{README} file to Texinfo format. I'd
407 also like to thank all the @ccmode{} victims who help enormously
408 during the early beta stages of @ccmode{}'s development.
409
410 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
411 @node Overview, Getting Started, Introduction, Top
412 @comment node-name, next, previous, up@cindex organization of the manual
413 @chapter Overview of the Manual
414 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
415
416 @noindent
417 The manual starts with several introductory chapters (including this
418 one).
419
420 @noindent
421 The next chunk of the manual describes the day to day @emph{use} of
422 @ccmode{} (as contrasted with how to customize it).
423
424 @itemize @bullet
425 @item
426 The chapter ``Commands'' describes in detail how to use (nearly) all
427 of @ccmode{}'s features. There are extensive cross-references from
428 here to the corresponding sections later in the manual which tell you
429 how to customize these features.
430
431 @item
432 ``Font Locking'' describes how ``syntax highlighting'' is applied to
433 your buffers. It is mainly background information and can be skipped
434 over at a first reading.
435 @end itemize
436
437 @noindent
438 The next chunk of the manual describes how to @emph{customize}
439 @ccmode{}. Typically, an overview of a topic is given at the chapter
440 level, then the sections and subsections describe the material in
441 increasing detail.
442
443 @itemize @bullet
444 @item
445 The chapter ``Configuration Basics'' tells you @emph{how} to write
446 customizations: whether in hooks, in styles, in both, or in neither,
447 depending on your needs. It describes the @ccmode{} style system and
448 lists the standard styles that @ccmode{} supplies.
449
450 @item
451 The next few chapters describe in detail how to customize the various
452 features of @ccmode{}.
453
454 @item
455 Finally, there is a sample @file{.emacs} fragment, which might help you
456 in creating your own customization.
457 @end itemize
458
459 @noindent
460 The manual ends with ``this and that'', things that don't fit cleanly
461 into any of the previous chunks.
462
463 @itemize @bullet
464 @item
465 Two chapters discuss the performance of @ccmode{} and known
466 bugs/limitations.
467
468 @item
469 The FAQ contains a list of common problems and questions.
470
471 @item
472 The next two chapters tell you how to get in touch with the @ccmode{}
473 project: whether for updating @ccmode{} or submitting bug reports.
474 @end itemize
475
476 @noindent
477 Finally, there are the customary indices.
478
479 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
480 @node Getting Started, Commands, Overview, Top
481 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
482 @chapter Getting Started
483 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
484
485 If you got this version of @ccmode{} with Emacs or XEmacs, it should
486 work just fine right out of the box. Note however that you might not
487 have the latest @ccmode{} release and might want to upgrade your copy
488 (see below).
489
490 You should probably start by skimming through the entire Commands chapter
491 (@pxref{Commands}) to get an overview of @ccmode{}'s capabilities.
492
493 After trying out some commands, you may dislike some aspects of
494 @ccmode{}'s default configuration. Here is an outline of how to
495 change some of the settings that newcomers to @ccmode{} most often
496 want to change:
497
498 @table @asis
499 @item c-basic-offset
500 This Lisp variable holds an integer, the number of columns @ccmode{}
501 indents nested code. To set this value to 6, customize
502 @code{c-basic-offset} or put this into your @file{.emacs}:
503
504 @example
505 (setq c-basic-offset 6)
506 @end example
507
508 @item The (indentation) style
509 The basic ``shape'' of indentation created by @ccmode{}---by default,
510 this is @code{gnu} style (except for Java and AWK buffers). A list of
511 the available styles and their descriptions can be found in
512 @ref{Built-in Styles}. A complete specification of the @ccmode{}
513 style system, including how to create your own style, can be found in
514 the chapter @ref{Styles}. To set your style to @code{linux}, either
515 customize @code{c-default-style} or put this into your @file{.emacs}:
516
517 @example
518 (setq c-default-style '((java-mode . "java")
519 (awk-mode . "awk")
520 (other . "linux")))
521 @end example
522
523 @item Electric Indentation
524 Normally, when you type ``punctuation'' characters such as @samp{;} or
525 @samp{@{}, @ccmode{} instantly reindents the current line. This can
526 be disconcerting until you get used to it. To disable @dfn{electric
527 indentation} in the current buffer, type @kbd{C-c C-l}. Type the same
528 thing to enable it again. To have electric indentation disabled by
529 default, put the following into your @file{.emacs} file@footnote{There
530 is no ``easy customization'' facility for making this change.}:
531
532 @example
533 (setq-default c-electric-flag nil)
534 @end example
535
536 @noindent
537 Details of this and other similar ``Minor Modes'' appear in the
538 section @ref{Minor Modes}.
539
540 @item Making the @key{RET} key indent the new line
541 The standard Emacs binding for @key{RET} just adds a new line. If you
542 want it to reindent the new line as well, rebind the key. Note that
543 the action of rebinding would fail if the pertinent keymap didn't yet
544 exist---we thus need to delay the action until after @ccmode{} has
545 been loaded. Put the following code into your @file{.emacs}:
546
547 @example
548 (defun my-make-CR-do-indent ()
549 (define-key c-mode-base-map "\C-m" 'c-context-line-break))
550 (add-hook 'c-initialization-hook 'my-make-CR-do-indent)
551 @end example
552
553 @noindent
554 This example demonstrates the use of a very powerful @ccmode{} (and
555 Emacs) facility, the hook. The use of @ccmode{}'s hooks is described
556 in @ref{CC Hooks}.
557 @end table
558
559 All these settings should occur in your @file{.emacs} @emph{before}
560 any @ccmode{} buffers get loaded---in particular, before any call of
561 @code{desktop-read}.
562
563 As you get to know the mode better, you may want to make more
564 ambitious changes to your configuration. For this, you should start
565 reading the chapter @ref{Config Basics}.
566
567 If you are upgrading an existing @ccmode{} installation, please see
568 the @file{README} file for installation details. In particular, if
569 you are going to be editing AWK files, @file{README} describes how to
570 configure your (X)Emacs so that @ccmode{} will supersede the obsolete
571 @code{awk-mode.el} which might have been supplied with your (X)Emacs.
572 @ccmode{} might not work with older versions of Emacs or XEmacs. See
573 the @ccmode{} release notes at @uref{http://cc-mode.sourceforge.net}
574 for the latest information on Emacs version and package compatibility
575 (@pxref{Updating CC Mode}).
576
577 @deffn Command c-version
578 @findex version (c-)
579 You can find out what version of @ccmode{} you are using by visiting a C
580 file and entering @kbd{M-x c-version RET}. You should see this message in
581 the echo area:
582
583 @example
584 Using CC Mode version 5.XX
585 @end example
586
587 @noindent
588 where @samp{XX} is the minor release number.
589 @end deffn
590
591 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
592 @node Commands, Font Locking, Getting Started, Top
593 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
594 @chapter Commands
595 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
596
597 This chapter specifies all of CC Mode's commands, and thus contains
598 nearly everything you need to know to @emph{use} @ccmode{} (as
599 contrasted with configuring it). @dfn{Commands} here means both
600 control key sequences and @dfn{electric keys}, these being characters
601 such as @samp{;} which, as well as inserting themselves into the
602 buffer, also do other things.
603
604 You might well want to review
605 @ifset XEMACS
606 @ref{Lists,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}},
607 @end ifset
608 @ifclear XEMACS
609 @ref{Moving by Parens,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}},
610 @end ifclear
611 which describes commands for moving around brace and parenthesis
612 structures.
613
614
615 @menu
616 * Indentation Commands::
617 * Comment Commands::
618 * Movement Commands::
619 * Filling and Breaking::
620 * Minor Modes::
621 * Electric Keys::
622 * Auto-newlines::
623 * Hungry WS Deletion::
624 * Subword Movement::
625 * Other Commands::
626 @end menu
627
628 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
629 @node Indentation Commands, Comment Commands, Commands, Commands
630 @comment node-name, next, previous,up
631 @section Indentation Commands
632 @cindex indentation
633 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
634
635 The following commands reindent C constructs. Note that when you
636 change your coding style, either interactively or through some other
637 means, your file does @emph{not} automatically get reindented. You
638 will need to execute one of the following commands to see the effects
639 of your changes.
640
641 @cindex GNU indent program
642 Also, variables like @code{c-hanging-*} and @code{c-cleanup-list}
643 (@pxref{Custom Auto-newlines}) only affect how on-the-fly code is
644 formatted. Changing the ``hanginess'' of a brace and then
645 reindenting, will not move the brace to a different line. For this,
646 you're better off getting an external program like GNU @code{indent},
647 which will rearrange brace location, amongst other things.
648
649 Preprocessor directives are handled as syntactic whitespace from other
650 code, i.e., they can be interspersed anywhere without affecting the
651 indentation of the surrounding code, just like comments.
652
653 The code inside macro definitions is, by default, still analyzed
654 syntactically so that you get relative indentation there just as you'd
655 get if the same code was outside a macro. However, since there is no
656 hint about the syntactic context, i.e., whether the macro expands to an
657 expression, to some statements, or perhaps to whole functions, the
658 syntactic recognition can be wrong. @ccmode{} manages to figure it
659 out correctly most of the time, though.
660
661 Some macros, when invoked, ''have their own semicolon''. To get the
662 next line indented correctly, rather than as a continuation line,
663 @xref{Macros with ;}.
664
665 Reindenting large sections of code can take a long time. When
666 @ccmode{} reindents a region of code, it is essentially equivalent to
667 hitting @key{TAB} on every line of the region.
668
669 These commands indent code:
670
671 @table @asis
672 @item @kbd{@key{TAB}} (@code{c-indent-command})
673 @kindex TAB
674 @findex c-indent-command
675 @findex indent-command (c-)
676 This command indents the current line. That is all you need to know
677 about it for normal use.
678
679 @code{c-indent-command} does different things, depending on the
680 setting of @code{c-syntactic-indentation} (@pxref{Indentation Engine
681 Basics}):
682
683 @itemize @bullet
684 @item
685 When it's non-@code{nil} (which it normally is), the command indents
686 the line according to its syntactic context. With a prefix argument
687 (@kbd{C-u @key{TAB}}), it will re-indent the entire
688 expression@footnote{this is only useful for a line starting with a
689 comment opener or an opening brace, parenthesis, or string quote.}
690 that begins at the line's left margin.
691
692 @item
693 When it's @code{nil}, the command indents the line by an extra
694 @code{c-basic-offset} columns. A prefix argument acts as a
695 multiplier. A bare prefix (@kbd{C-u @key{TAB}}) is equivalent to -1,
696 removing @code{c-basic-offset} columns from the indentation.
697 @end itemize
698
699 The precise behavior is modified by several variables: With
700 @code{c-tab-always-indent}, you can make @key{TAB} insert whitespace
701 in some circumstances---@code{c-insert-tab-function} then defines
702 precisely what sort of ``whitespace'' this will be. Set the standard
703 Emacs variable @code{indent-tabs-mode} to @code{t} if you want real
704 @samp{tab} characters to be used in the indentation, to @code{nil} if
705 you want only spaces. @xref{Just Spaces,,,@emacsman{},
706 @emacsmantitle{}}.
707
708 @defopt c-tab-always-indent
709 @vindex tab-always-indent (c-)
710 @cindex literal
711 This variable modifies how @key{TAB} operates.
712 @itemize @bullet
713 @item
714 When it is @code{t} (the default), @key{TAB} simply indents the
715 current line.
716 @item
717 When it is @code{nil}, @key{TAB} (re)indents the line only if point is
718 to the left of the first non-whitespace character on the line.
719 Otherwise it inserts some whitespace (a tab or an equivalent number of
720 spaces; see below) at point.
721 @item
722 With some other value, the line is reindented. Additionally, if point
723 is within a string or comment, some whitespace is inserted.
724 @end itemize
725 @end defopt
726
727 @defopt c-insert-tab-function
728 @vindex insert-tab-function (c-)
729 @findex tab-to-tab-stop
730 When ``some whitespace'' is inserted as described above, what actually
731 happens is that the function stored in @code{c-insert-tab-function} is
732 called. Normally, this is @code{insert-tab}, which inserts a real tab
733 character or the equivalent number of spaces (depending on
734 @code{indent-tabs-mode}). Some people, however, set
735 @code{c-insert-tab-function} to @code{tab-to-tab-stop} so as to get
736 hard tab stops when indenting.
737 @end defopt
738 @end table
739
740 @noindent
741 The kind of indentation the next five commands do depends on the
742 setting of @code{c-syntactic-indentation} (@pxref{Indentation Engine
743 Basics}):
744 @itemize @bullet
745 @item
746 when it is non-@code{nil} (the default), the commands indent lines
747 according to their syntactic context;
748 @item
749 when it is @code{nil}, they just indent each line the same amount as
750 the previous non-blank line. The commands that indent a region aren't
751 very useful in this case.
752 @end itemize
753
754 @table @asis
755 @item @kbd{C-M-q} (@code{c-indent-exp})
756 @kindex C-M-q
757 @findex c-indent-exp
758 @findex indent-exp (c-)
759 Indents an entire balanced brace or parenthesis expression. Note that
760 point must be on the opening brace or parenthesis of the expression
761 you want to indent.
762
763 @item @kbd{C-c C-q} (@code{c-indent-defun})
764 @kindex C-c C-q
765 @findex c-indent-defun
766 @findex indent-defun (c-)
767 Indents the entire top-level function, class or macro definition
768 encompassing point. It leaves point unchanged. This function can't be
769 used to reindent a nested brace construct, such as a nested class or
770 function, or a Java method. The top-level construct being reindented
771 must be complete, i.e., it must have both a beginning brace and an ending
772 brace.
773
774 @item @kbd{C-M-\} (@code{indent-region})
775 @kindex C-M-\
776 @findex indent-region
777 Indents an arbitrary region of code. This is a standard Emacs command,
778 tailored for C code in a @ccmode{} buffer. Note, of course, that point
779 and mark must delineate the region you want to indent.
780
781 @item @kbd{C-M-h} (@code{c-mark-function})
782 @kindex C-M-h
783 @findex c-mark-function
784 @findex mark-function (c-)
785 While not strictly an indentation command, this is useful for marking
786 the current top-level function or class definition as the current
787 region. As with @code{c-indent-defun}, this command operates on
788 top-level constructs, and can't be used to mark say, a Java method.
789 @end table
790
791 These variables are also useful when indenting code:
792
793 @defopt indent-tabs-mode
794 This is a standard Emacs variable that controls how line indentation
795 is composed. When it's non-@code{nil}, tabs can be used in a line's
796 indentation, otherwise only spaces are used.
797 @end defopt
798
799 @defopt c-progress-interval
800 @vindex progress-interval (c-)
801 When indenting large regions of code, this variable controls how often a
802 progress message is displayed. Set this variable to @code{nil} to
803 inhibit the progress messages, or set it to an integer which is how
804 often (in seconds) progress messages are to be displayed.
805 @end defopt
806
807 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
808 @node Comment Commands, Movement Commands, Indentation Commands, Commands
809 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
810 @section Comment Commands
811 @cindex comments (insertion of)
812 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
813
814 @table @asis
815 @item @kbd{C-c C-c} (@code{comment-region})
816 @kindex C-c C-c
817 @findex comment-region
818 This command comments out the lines that start in the region. With a
819 negative argument, it does the opposite: it deletes the comment
820 delimiters from these lines. @xref{Multi-Line Comments,,, emacs, GNU
821 Emacs Manual}, for fuller details. @code{comment-region} isn't
822 actually part of @ccmode{}; it is given a @ccmode{} binding for
823 convenience.
824
825 @item @kbd{M-;} (@code{comment-dwim} or @code{indent-for-comment} @footnote{The name of this command varies between (X)Emacs versions.})
826 @kindex M-;
827 @findex comment-dwim
828 @findex indent-for-comment
829 Insert a comment at the end of the current line, if none is there
830 already. Then reindent the comment according to @code{comment-column}
831 @ifclear XEMACS
832 (@pxref{Options for Comments,,, emacs, GNU Emacs Manual})
833 @end ifclear
834 @ifset XEMACS
835 (@pxref{Comments,,, xemacs, XEmacs User's Manual})
836 @end ifset
837 and the variables below. Finally, position the point after the
838 comment starter. @kbd{C-u M-;} kills any comment on the current line,
839 together with any whitespace before it. This is a standard Emacs
840 command, but @ccmode{} enhances it a bit with two variables:
841
842 @defopt c-indent-comment-alist
843 @vindex indent-comment-alist (c-)
844 @vindex comment-column
845 This style variable allows you to vary the column that @kbd{M-;} puts
846 the comment at, depending on what sort of code is on the line, and
847 possibly the indentation of any similar comment on the preceding line.
848 It is an association list that maps different types of lines to
849 actions describing how they should be handled. If a certain line type
850 isn't present on the list then the line is indented to the column
851 specified by @code{comment-column}.
852
853 See the documentation string for a full description of this
854 variable (use @kbd{C-h v c-indent-comment-alist}).
855 @end defopt
856
857 @defopt c-indent-comments-syntactically-p
858 @vindex indent-comments-syntactically-p (c-)
859 Normally, when this style variable is @code{nil}, @kbd{M-;} will
860 indent comment-only lines according to @code{c-indent-comment-alist},
861 just as it does with lines where other code precede the comments.
862 However, if you want it to act just like @key{TAB} for comment-only
863 lines you can get that by setting
864 @code{c-indent-comments-syntactically-p} to non-@code{nil}.
865
866 If @code{c-indent-comments-syntactically-p} is non-@code{nil} then
867 @code{c-indent-comment-alist} won't be consulted at all for comment-only
868 lines.
869 @end defopt
870 @end table
871
872 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
873 @node Movement Commands, Filling and Breaking, Comment Commands, Commands
874 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
875 @section Movement Commands
876 @cindex movement
877 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
878
879 @ccmode{} contains some useful commands for moving around in C code.
880
881 @table @asis
882 @item @kbd{C-M-a} (@code{c-beginning-of-defun})
883 @itemx @kbd{C-M-e} (@code{c-end-of-defun})
884 @findex c-beginning-of-defun
885 @findex c-end-of-defun
886 @vindex c-defun-tactic
887 @vindex defun-tactic (c-)
888
889 Move to the beginning or end of the current or next function. Other
890 constructs (such as a structs or classes) which have a brace block
891 also count as ``functions'' here. To move over several functions, you
892 can give these commands a repeat count.
893
894 The start of a function is at its header. The end of the function is
895 after its closing brace, or after the semicolon of a construct (such
896 as a @code{struct}) which doesn't end at the brace. These two
897 commands try to leave point at the beginning of a line near the actual
898 start or end of the function. This occasionally causes point not to
899 move at all.
900
901 By default, these commands will recognize functions contained within a
902 @dfn{declaration scope} such as a C++ @code{class} or @code{namespace}
903 construct, should the point start inside it. If @ccmode fails to find
904 function beginnings or ends inside the current declaration scope, it
905 will search the enclosing scopes. If you want @ccmode to recognize
906 functions only at the top level@footnote{this was @ccmode{}'s
907 behavior prior to version 5.32.}, set @code{c-defun-tactic} to
908 @code{t}.
909
910 These functions are analogous to the Emacs built-in commands
911 @code{beginning-of-defun} and @code{end-of-defun}, except they
912 eliminate the constraint that the top-level opening brace of the defun
913 must be in column zero. See @ref{Defuns,,,@emacsman{},
914 @emacsmantitle{}}, for more information.
915
916 @item @kbd{C-M-a} (AWK Mode) (@code{c-awk-beginning-of-defun})
917 @itemx @kbd{C-M-e} (AWK Mode) (@code{c-awk-end-of-defun})
918 @kindex C-M-a (AWK Mode)
919 @kindex C-M-e (AWK Mode)
920 @findex c-awk-beginning-of-defun
921 @findex awk-beginning-of-defun (c-)
922 @findex c-awk-end-of-defun
923 @findex awk-end-of-defun (c-)
924 Move to the beginning or end of the current or next AWK defun. These
925 commands can take prefix-arguments, their functionality being entirely
926 equivalent to @code{beginning-of-defun} and @code{end-of-defun}.
927
928 AWK Mode @dfn{defuns} are either pattern/action pairs (either of which
929 might be implicit) or user defined functions. Having the @samp{@{} and
930 @samp{@}} (if there are any) in column zero, as is suggested for some
931 modes, is neither necessary nor helpful in AWK mode.
932
933 @item @kbd{M-a} (@code{c-beginning-of-statement})
934 @itemx @kbd{M-e} (@code{c-end-of-statement})
935 @kindex M-a
936 @kindex M-e
937 @findex c-beginning-of-statement
938 @findex c-end-of-statement
939 @findex beginning-of-statement (c-)
940 @findex end-of-statement (c-)
941 Move to the beginning or end of the innermost C statement. If point
942 is already there, move to the next beginning or end of a statement,
943 even if that means moving into a block. (Use @kbd{C-M-b} or
944 @kbd{C-M-f} to move over a balanced block.) A prefix argument @var{n}
945 means move over @var{n} statements.
946
947 If point is within or next to a comment or a string which spans more
948 than one line, these commands move by sentences instead of statements.
949
950 When called from a program, these functions take three optional
951 arguments: the repetition count, a buffer position limit which is the
952 farthest back to search for the syntactic context, and a flag saying
953 whether to do sentence motion in or near comments and multiline
954 strings.
955
956 @item @kbd{C-c C-u} (@code{c-up-conditional})
957 @kindex C-c C-u
958 @findex c-up-conditional
959 @findex up-conditional (c-)
960 Move back to the containing preprocessor conditional, leaving the mark
961 behind. A prefix argument acts as a repeat count. With a negative
962 argument, move forward to the end of the containing preprocessor
963 conditional.
964
965 @samp{#elif} is treated like @samp{#else} followed by @samp{#if}, so the
966 function stops at them when going backward, but not when going
967 forward.
968
969 This key sequence is not bound in AWK Mode, which doesn't have
970 preprocessor statements.
971
972 @item @kbd{M-x c-up-conditional-with-else}
973 @findex c-up-conditional-with-else
974 @findex up-conditional-with-else (c-)
975 A variety of @code{c-up-conditional} that also stops at @samp{#else}
976 lines. Normally those lines are ignored.
977
978 @item @kbd{M-x c-down-conditional}
979 @findex c-down-conditional
980 @findex down-conditional (c-)
981 Move forward into the next nested preprocessor conditional, leaving
982 the mark behind. A prefix argument acts as a repeat count. With a
983 negative argument, move backward into the previous nested preprocessor
984 conditional.
985
986 @samp{#elif} is treated like @samp{#else} followed by @samp{#if}, so the
987 function stops at them when going forward, but not when going backward.
988
989 @item @kbd{M-x c-down-conditional-with-else}
990 @findex c-down-conditional-with-else
991 @findex down-conditional-with-else (c-)
992 A variety of @code{c-down-conditional} that also stops at @samp{#else}
993 lines. Normally those lines are ignored.
994
995 @item @kbd{C-c C-p} (@code{c-backward-conditional})
996 @itemx @kbd{C-c C-n} (@code{c-forward-conditional})
997 @kindex C-c C-p
998 @kindex C-c C-n
999 @findex c-backward-conditional
1000 @findex c-forward-conditional
1001 @findex backward-conditional (c-)
1002 @findex forward-conditional (c-)
1003 Move backward or forward across a preprocessor conditional, leaving
1004 the mark behind. A prefix argument acts as a repeat count. With a
1005 negative argument, move in the opposite direction.
1006
1007 These key sequences are not bound in AWK Mode, which doesn't have
1008 preprocessor statements.
1009
1010 @item @kbd{M-x c-backward-into-nomenclature}
1011 @itemx @kbd{M-x c-forward-into-nomenclature}
1012 @findex c-backward-into-nomenclature
1013 @findex c-forward-into-nomenclature
1014 @findex backward-into-nomenclature (c-)
1015 @findex forward-into-nomenclature (c-)
1016 A popular programming style, especially for object-oriented languages
1017 such as C++ is to write symbols in a mixed case format, where the
1018 first letter of each word is capitalized, and not separated by
1019 underscores. E.g., @samp{SymbolsWithMixedCaseAndNoUnderlines}.
1020
1021 These commands move backward or forward to the beginning of the next
1022 capitalized word. With prefix argument @var{n}, move @var{n} times.
1023 If @var{n} is negative, move in the opposite direction.
1024
1025 Note that these two commands have been superseded by
1026 @code{subword-mode}, which you should use instead. @xref{Subword
1027 Movement}. They might be removed from a future release of @ccmode{}.
1028 @end table
1029
1030 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1031 @node Filling and Breaking, Minor Modes, Movement Commands, Commands
1032 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1033 @section Filling and Line Breaking Commands
1034 @cindex text filling
1035 @cindex line breaking
1036 @cindex comment handling
1037 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1038
1039 Since there's a lot of normal text in comments and string literals,
1040 @ccmode{} provides features to edit these like in text mode. The goal
1041 is to do it seamlessly, i.e., you can use auto fill mode, sentence and
1042 paragraph movement, paragraph filling, adaptive filling etc.@: wherever
1043 there's a piece of normal text without having to think much about it.
1044 @ccmode{} keeps the indentation, fixes suitable comment line prefixes,
1045 and so on.
1046
1047 You can configure the exact way comments get filled and broken, and
1048 where Emacs does auto-filling (see @pxref{Custom Filling and
1049 Breaking}). Typically, the style system (@pxref{Styles}) will have
1050 set this up for you, so you probably won't have to bother.
1051
1052 @findex auto-fill-mode
1053 @cindex Auto Fill mode
1054 @cindex paragraph filling
1055 Line breaks are by default handled (almost) the same regardless of
1056 whether they are made by auto fill mode (@pxref{Auto
1057 Fill,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}}), by paragraph filling (e.g., with
1058 @kbd{M-q}), or explicitly with @kbd{M-j} or similar methods. In
1059 string literals, the new line gets the same indentation as the
1060 previous nonempty line.@footnote{You can change this default by
1061 setting the @code{string} syntactic symbol (@pxref{Syntactic Symbols}
1062 and @pxref{Customizing Indentation})}.
1063
1064 @table @asis
1065 @item @kbd{M-q} (@code{c-fill-paragraph})
1066 @kindex M-q
1067 @findex c-fill-paragraph
1068 @findex fill-paragraph (c-)
1069 @cindex Javadoc markup
1070 @cindex Pike autodoc markup
1071 This command fills multiline string literals and both block
1072 and line style comments. In Java buffers, the Javadoc markup words
1073 are recognized as paragraph starters. The line oriented Pike autodoc
1074 markup words are recognized in the same way in Pike mode.
1075
1076 The formatting of the starters (@code{/*}) and enders (@code{*/}) of
1077 block comments are kept as they were before the filling. I.e., if
1078 either the starter or ender were on a line of its own, then it stays
1079 on its own line; conversely, if the delimiter has comment text on its
1080 line, it keeps at least one word of that text with it on the line.
1081
1082 This command is the replacement for @code{fill-paragraph} in @ccmode{}
1083 buffers.
1084
1085 @item @kbd{M-j} (@code{c-indent-new-comment-line})
1086 @kindex M-j
1087 @findex c-indent-new-comment-line
1088 @findex indent-new-comment-line (c-)
1089 This breaks the current line at point and indents the new line. If
1090 point was in a comment, the new line gets the proper comment line
1091 prefix. If point was inside a macro, a backslash is inserted before
1092 the line break. It is the replacement for
1093 @code{indent-new-comment-line}.
1094
1095 @item @kbd{M-x c-context-line-break}
1096 @findex c-context-line-break
1097 @findex context-line-break (c-)
1098 Insert a line break suitable to the context: If the point is inside a
1099 comment, the new line gets the suitable indentation and comment line
1100 prefix like @code{c-indent-new-comment-line}. In normal code it's
1101 indented like @code{newline-and-indent} would do. In macros it acts
1102 like @code{newline-and-indent} but additionally inserts and optionally
1103 aligns the line ending backslash so that the macro remains unbroken.
1104 @xref{Custom Macros}, for details about the backslash alignment. In a
1105 string, a backslash is inserted only if the string is within a
1106 macro@footnote{In GCC, unescaped line breaks within strings are
1107 valid.}.
1108
1109 This function is not bound to a key by default, but it's intended to be
1110 used on the @kbd{RET} key. If you like the behavior of
1111 @code{newline-and-indent} on @kbd{RET}, you should consider switching to
1112 this function. @xref{Sample Init File}.
1113
1114 @item @kbd{M-x c-context-open-line}
1115 @findex c-context-open-line
1116 @findex context-open-line (c-)
1117 This is to @kbd{C-o} (@kbd{M-x open-line}) as
1118 @code{c-context-line-break} is to @kbd{RET}. I.e., it works just like
1119 @code{c-context-line-break} but leaves the point before the inserted
1120 line break.
1121 @end table
1122
1123
1124 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1125 @node Minor Modes, Electric Keys, Filling and Breaking, Commands
1126 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1127 @section Minor Modes
1128 @cindex Minor Modes
1129 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1130
1131 @ccmode{} contains several minor-mode-like features that you might
1132 find useful while writing new code or editing old code:
1133
1134 @table @asis
1135 @item electric mode
1136 When this is enabled, certain visible characters cause reformatting as
1137 they are typed. This is normally helpful, but can be a nuisance when
1138 editing chaotically formatted code. It can also be disconcerting,
1139 especially for users who are new to @ccmode{}.
1140 @item auto-newline mode
1141 This automatically inserts newlines where you'd probably want to type
1142 them yourself, e.g., after typing @samp{@}}s. Its action is suppressed
1143 when electric mode is disabled.
1144 @item hungry-delete mode
1145 This lets you delete a contiguous block of whitespace with a single
1146 key: for example, the newline and indentation just inserted by
1147 auto-newline when you want to back up and write a comment after the
1148 last statement.
1149 @item subword mode
1150 This mode makes basic word movement commands like @kbd{M-f}
1151 (@code{forward-word}) and @kbd{M-b} (@code{backward-word}) treat the
1152 parts of sillycapsed symbols as different words.
1153 E.g., @samp{NSGraphicsContext} is treated as three words @samp{NS},
1154 @samp{Graphics}, and @samp{Context}.
1155 @item syntactic-indentation mode
1156 When this is enabled (which it normally is), indentation commands such
1157 as @kbd{C-j} indent lines of code according to their syntactic
1158 structure. Otherwise, a line is simply indented to the same level as
1159 the previous one and @kbd{@key{TAB}} adjusts the indentation in steps
1160 of @code{c-basic-offset}.
1161 @end table
1162
1163 Full details on how these minor modes work are at @ref{Electric Keys},
1164 @ref{Auto-newlines}, @ref{Hungry WS Deletion}, @ref{Subword Movement},
1165 and @ref{Indentation Engine Basics}.
1166
1167 You can toggle each of these minor modes on and off, and you can
1168 configure @ccmode{} so that it starts up with your favorite
1169 combination of them (@pxref{Sample Init File}). By default, when
1170 you initialize a buffer, electric mode and syntactic-indentation mode
1171 are enabled but the other three modes are disabled.
1172
1173 @ccmode{} displays the current state of the first four of these minor
1174 modes on the modeline by appending letters to the major mode's name,
1175 one letter for each enabled minor mode: @samp{l} for electric mode,
1176 @samp{a} for auto-newline mode, @samp{h} for hungry delete mode, and
1177 @samp{w} for subword mode. If all these modes were enabled, you'd see
1178 @samp{C/lahw}@footnote{The @samp{C} would be replaced with the name of
1179 the language in question for the other languages @ccmode{} supports.}.
1180
1181 Here are the commands to toggle these modes:
1182
1183 @table @asis
1184 @item @kbd{C-c C-l} (@code{c-toggle-electric-state})
1185 @kindex C-c C-l
1186 @findex c-toggle-electric-state
1187 @findex toggle-electric-state (c-)
1188 Toggle electric minor mode. When the command turns the mode off, it
1189 also suppresses auto-newline mode.
1190
1191 @item @kbd{C-c C-a} (@code{c-toggle-auto-newline})
1192 @kindex C-c C-a
1193 @findex c-toggle-auto-newline
1194 @findex toggle-auto-newline (c-)
1195 Toggle auto-newline minor mode. When the command turns the mode on,
1196 it also enables electric minor mode.
1197
1198 @item @kbd{M-x c-toggle-hungry-state}@footnote{Prior to @ccmode{} 5.31, this command was bound to @kbd{C-c C-d}.}
1199 @findex c-toggle-hungry-state
1200 @findex toggle-hungry-state (c-)
1201 Toggle hungry-delete minor mode.
1202
1203 @item @kbd{M-x c-toggle-auto-hungry-state}@footnote{Prior to @ccmode{} 5.31, this command was bound to @kbd{C-c C-t}.}
1204 @findex c-toggle-auto-hungry-state
1205 @findex toggle-auto-hungry-state (c-)
1206 Toggle both auto-newline and hungry delete minor modes.
1207
1208 @item @kbd{C-c C-w} (@code{M-x subword-mode})
1209 @kindex C-c C-w
1210 @findex subword-mode
1211 Toggle subword mode.
1212
1213 @item @kbd{M-x c-toggle-syntactic-indentation}
1214 @findex c-toggle-syntactic-indentation
1215 @findex toggle-syntactic-indentation (c-)
1216 Toggle syntactic-indentation mode.
1217 @end table
1218
1219 Common to all the toggle functions above is that if they are called
1220 programmatically, they take an optional numerical argument. A
1221 positive value will turn on the minor mode (or both of them in the
1222 case of @code{c-toggle-auto-hungry-state}) and a negative value will
1223 turn it (or them) off.
1224
1225
1226 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1227 @node Electric Keys, Auto-newlines, Minor Modes, Commands
1228 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1229 @section Electric Keys and Keywords
1230 @cindex electric characters
1231 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1232
1233 Most punctuation keys provide @dfn{electric} behavior: as well as
1234 inserting themselves they perform some other action, such as
1235 reindenting the line. This reindentation saves you from having to
1236 reindent a line manually after typing, say, a @samp{@}}. A few
1237 keywords, such as @code{else}, also trigger electric action.
1238
1239 You can inhibit the electric behavior described here by disabling
1240 electric minor mode (@pxref{Minor Modes}).
1241
1242 Common to all these keys is that they only behave electrically when
1243 used in normal code (as contrasted with getting typed in a string
1244 literal or comment). Those which cause re-indentation do so only when
1245 @code{c-syntactic-indentation} has a non-@code{nil} value (which it
1246 does by default).
1247
1248 These keys and keywords are:
1249 @c ACM, 2004/8/24: c-electric-pound doesn't check c-s-i: this is more
1250 @c like a bug in the code than a bug in this document. It'll get
1251 @c fixed in the code sometime.
1252
1253 @table @kbd
1254 @item #
1255 @kindex #
1256 @findex c-electric-pound
1257 @findex electric-pound (c-)
1258 @vindex c-electric-pound-behavior
1259 @vindex electric-pound-behavior (c-)
1260 Pound (bound to @code{c-electric-pound}) is electric when typed as the
1261 first non-whitespace character on a line and not within a macro
1262 definition. In this case, the variable @code{c-electric-pound-behavior}
1263 is consulted for the electric behavior. This variable takes a list
1264 value, although the only element currently defined is @code{alignleft},
1265 which tells this command to force the @samp{#} character into column
1266 zero. This is useful for entering preprocessor macro definitions.
1267
1268 Pound is not electric in AWK buffers, where @samp{#} starts a comment,
1269 and is bound to @code{self-insert-command} like any typical printable
1270 character.
1271 @c ACM, 2004/8/24: Change this (and the code) to do AWK comment
1272 @c reindentation.
1273
1274 @item *
1275 @kindex *
1276 @itemx /
1277 @kindex /
1278 @findex c-electric-star
1279 @findex electric-star (c-)
1280 @findex c-electric-slash
1281 @findex electric-slash (c-)
1282 A star (bound to @code{c-electric-star}) or a slash
1283 (@code{c-electric-slash}) causes reindentation when you type it as the
1284 second component of a C style block comment opener (@samp{/*}) or a
1285 C++ line comment opener (@samp{//}) respectively, but only if the
1286 comment opener is the first thing on the line (i.e., there's only
1287 whitespace before it).
1288
1289 Additionally, you can configure @ccmode{} so that typing a slash at
1290 the start of a line within a block comment will terminate the
1291 comment. You don't need to have electric minor mode enabled to get
1292 this behavior. @xref{Clean-ups}.
1293
1294 In AWK mode, @samp{*} and @samp{/} do not delimit comments and are not
1295 electric.
1296
1297 @item <
1298 @kindex <
1299 @itemx >
1300 @kindex >
1301 @findex c-electric-lt-gt
1302 @findex electric-lt-gt (c-)
1303 A less-than or greater-than sign (bound to @code{c-electric-lt-gt}) is
1304 electric in two circumstances: when it is an angle bracket in a C++
1305 @samp{template} declaration (and similar constructs in other
1306 languages) and when it is the second of two @kbd{<} or @kbd{>}
1307 characters in a C++ style stream operator. In either case, the line
1308 is reindented. Angle brackets in C @samp{#include} directives are not
1309 electric.
1310
1311 @item (
1312 @kindex (
1313 @itemx )
1314 @kindex )
1315 @findex c-electric-paren
1316 @findex electric-paren (c-)
1317 The normal parenthesis characters @samp{(} and @samp{)} (bound to
1318 @code{c-electric-paren}) reindent the current line. This is useful
1319 for getting the closing parenthesis of an argument list aligned
1320 automatically.
1321
1322 You can also configure @ccmode{} to insert a space automatically
1323 between a function name and the @samp{(} you've just typed, and to
1324 remove it automatically after typing @samp{)}, should the argument
1325 list be empty. You don't need to have electric minor mode enabled to
1326 get these actions. @xref{Clean-ups}.
1327
1328 @item @{
1329 @kindex @{
1330 @itemx @}
1331 @kindex @}
1332 @findex c-electric-brace
1333 @findex electric-brace (c-)
1334 Typing a brace (bound to @code{c-electric-brace}) reindents the
1335 current line. Also, one or more newlines might be inserted if
1336 auto-newline minor mode is enabled. @xref{Auto-newlines}.
1337 Additionally, you can configure @ccmode{} to compact excess whitespace
1338 inserted by auto-newline mode in certain circumstances.
1339 @xref{Clean-ups}.
1340
1341 @item :
1342 @kindex :
1343 @findex c-electric-colon
1344 @findex electric-colon (c-)
1345 Typing a colon (bound to @code{c-electric-colon}) reindents the
1346 current line. Additionally, one or more newlines might be inserted if
1347 auto-newline minor mode is enabled. @xref{Auto-newlines}. If you
1348 type a second colon immediately after such an auto-newline, by default
1349 the whitespace between the two colons is removed, leaving a C++ scope
1350 operator. @xref{Clean-ups}.
1351
1352 If you prefer, you can insert @samp{::} in a single operation,
1353 avoiding all these spurious reindentations, newlines, and clean-ups.
1354 @xref{Other Commands}.
1355
1356 @item ;
1357 @kindex ;
1358 @itemx ,
1359 @kindex ,
1360 @findex c-electric-semi&comma
1361 @findex electric-semi&comma (c-)
1362 Typing a semicolon or comma (bound to @code{c-electric-semi&comma})
1363 reindents the current line. Also, a newline might be inserted if
1364 auto-newline minor mode is enabled. @xref{Auto-newlines}.
1365 Additionally, you can configure @ccmode{} so that when auto-newline
1366 has inserted whitespace after a @samp{@}}, it will be removed again
1367 when you type a semicolon or comma just after it. @xref{Clean-ups}.
1368
1369 @end table
1370
1371 @deffn Command c-electric-continued-statement
1372 @findex electric-continued-statement (c-)
1373
1374 Certain keywords are electric, causing reindentation when they are
1375 preceded only by whitespace on the line. The keywords are those that
1376 continue an earlier statement instead of starting a new one:
1377 @code{else}, @code{while}, @code{catch} (only in C++ and Java) and
1378 @code{finally} (only in Java).
1379
1380 An example:
1381
1382 @example
1383 @group
1384 for (i = 0; i < 17; i++)
1385 if (a[i])
1386 res += a[i]->offset;
1387 else
1388 @end group
1389 @end example
1390
1391 Here, the @code{else} should be indented like the preceding @code{if},
1392 since it continues that statement. @ccmode{} will automatically
1393 reindent it after the @code{else} has been typed in full, since only
1394 then is it possible to decide whether it's a new statement or a
1395 continuation of the preceding @code{if}.
1396
1397 @vindex abbrev-mode
1398 @findex abbrev-mode
1399 @cindex Abbrev mode
1400 @ccmode{} uses Abbrev mode (@pxref{Abbrevs,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}})
1401 to accomplish this. It's therefore turned on by default in all language
1402 modes except IDL mode, since CORBA IDL doesn't have any statements.
1403 @end deffn
1404
1405
1406 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1407 @node Auto-newlines, Hungry WS Deletion, Electric Keys, Commands
1408 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1409 @section Auto-newline Insertion
1410 @cindex auto-newline
1411 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1412
1413 When you have @dfn{Auto-newline minor mode} enabled (@pxref{Minor
1414 Modes}), @ccmode{} inserts newlines for you automatically (in certain
1415 syntactic contexts) when you type a left or right brace, a colon, a
1416 semicolon, or a comma. Sometimes a newline appears before the
1417 character you type, sometimes after it, sometimes both.
1418
1419 Auto-newline only triggers when the following conditions hold:
1420
1421 @itemize @bullet
1422 @item
1423 Auto-newline minor mode is enabled, as evidenced by the indicator
1424 @samp{a} after the mode name on the modeline (e.g., @samp{C/a} or
1425 @samp{C/la}).
1426
1427 @item
1428 The character was typed at the end of a line, or with only whitespace
1429 after it, and possibly a @samp{\} escaping the newline.
1430
1431 @item
1432 The character is not on its own line already. (This applies only to
1433 insertion of a newline @emph{before} the character.)
1434
1435 @item
1436 @cindex literal
1437 @cindex syntactic whitespace
1438 The character was not typed inside of a literal @footnote{A
1439 @dfn{literal} is defined as any comment, string, or preprocessor macro
1440 definition. These constructs are also known as @dfn{syntactic
1441 whitespace} since they are usually ignored when scanning C code.}.
1442
1443 @item
1444 No numeric argument was supplied to the command (i.e., it was typed as
1445 normal, with no @kbd{C-u} prefix).
1446 @end itemize
1447
1448 You can configure the precise circumstances in which newlines get
1449 inserted (see @pxref{Custom Auto-newlines}). Typically, the style
1450 system (@pxref{Styles}) will have set this up for you, so you probably
1451 won't have to bother.
1452
1453 Sometimes @ccmode{} inserts an auto-newline where you don't want one,
1454 such as after a @samp{@}} when you're about to type a @samp{;}.
1455 Hungry deletion can help here (@pxref{Hungry WS Deletion}), or you can
1456 activate an appropriate @dfn{clean-up}, which will remove the excess
1457 whitespace after you've typed the @samp{;}. See @ref{Clean-ups} for a
1458 full description. See also @ref{Electric Keys} for a summary of
1459 clean-ups listed by key.
1460
1461
1462 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1463 @node Hungry WS Deletion, Subword Movement, Auto-newlines, Commands
1464 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1465 @section Hungry Deletion of Whitespace
1466 @cindex hungry-deletion
1467 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1468
1469 If you want to delete an entire block of whitespace at point, you can
1470 use @dfn{hungry deletion}. This deletes all the contiguous whitespace
1471 either before point or after point in a single operation.
1472 ``Whitespace'' here includes tabs and newlines, but not comments or
1473 preprocessor commands. Hungry deletion can markedly cut down on the
1474 number of times you have to hit deletion keys when, for example,
1475 you've made a mistake on the preceding line and have already pressed
1476 @kbd{C-j}.
1477
1478 Hungry deletion is a simple feature that some people find extremely
1479 useful. In fact, you might find yourself wanting it in @strong{all}
1480 your editing modes!
1481
1482 Loosely speaking, in what follows, @dfn{@key{DEL}} means ``the
1483 backspace key'' and @dfn{@key{DELETE}} means ``the forward delete
1484 key''. This is discussed in more detail below.
1485
1486 There are two different ways you can use hungry deletion:
1487
1488 @table @asis
1489 @item Using @dfn{Hungry Delete Mode} with @kbd{@key{DEL}} and @kbd{C-d}
1490 Here you toggle Hungry Delete minor mode with @kbd{M-x
1491 c-toggle-hungry-state}@footnote{Prior to @ccmode{} 5.31, this command
1492 was bound to @kbd{C-c C-d}. @kbd{C-c C-d} is now the default binding
1493 for @code{c-hungry-delete-forward}.} (@pxref{Minor Modes}.) This
1494 makes @kbd{@key{DEL}} and @kbd{C-d} do backwards and forward hungry
1495 deletion.
1496
1497 @table @asis
1498 @item @kbd{@key{DEL}} (@code{c-electric-backspace})
1499 @kindex DEL
1500 @findex c-electric-backspace
1501 @findex electric-backspace (c-)
1502 This command is run by default when you hit the @kbd{DEL} key. When
1503 hungry delete mode is enabled, it deletes any amount of whitespace in
1504 the backwards direction. Otherwise, or when used with a prefix
1505 argument or in a literal (@pxref{Auto-newlines}), the command just
1506 deletes backwards in the usual way. (More precisely, it calls the
1507 function contained in the variable @code{c-backspace-function},
1508 passing it the prefix argument, if any.)
1509
1510 @item @code{c-backspace-function}
1511 @vindex c-backspace-function
1512 @vindex backspace-function (c-)
1513 @findex backward-delete-char-untabify
1514 Hook that gets called by @code{c-electric-backspace} when it doesn't
1515 do an ``electric'' deletion of the preceding whitespace. The default
1516 value is @code{backward-delete-char-untabify}
1517 (@pxref{Deletion,,,@lispref{}, @lispreftitle{}}, the function which
1518 deletes a single character.
1519
1520 @item @kbd{C-d} (@code{c-electric-delete-forward})
1521 @kindex C-d
1522 @findex c-electric-delete-forward
1523 @findex electric-delete-forward (c-)
1524 This function, which is bound to @kbd{C-d} by default, works just like
1525 @code{c-electric-backspace} but in the forward direction. When it
1526 doesn't do an ``electric'' deletion of the following whitespace, it
1527 just does @code{delete-char}, more or less. (Strictly speaking, it
1528 calls the function in @code{c-delete-function} with the prefix
1529 argument.)
1530
1531 @item @code{c-delete-function}
1532 @vindex c-delete-function
1533 @vindex delete-function (c-)
1534 @findex delete-char
1535 Hook that gets called by @code{c-electric-delete-forward} when it
1536 doesn't do an ``electric'' deletion of the following whitespace. The
1537 default value is @code{delete-char}.
1538 @end table
1539
1540 @item Using Distinct Bindings
1541 The other (newer and recommended) way to use hungry deletion is to
1542 perform @code{c-hungry-delete-backwards} and
1543 @code{c-hungry-delete-forward} directly through their key sequences
1544 rather than using the minor mode toggling.
1545
1546 @table @asis
1547 @item @kbd{C-c C-@key{DEL}}, or @kbd{C-c @key{DEL}} (@code{c-hungry-delete-backwards})@footnote{This command was formerly known as @code{c-hungry-backspace}.}
1548 @kindex C-c C-<backspace>
1549 @kindex C-c <backspace>
1550 @kindex C-c C-DEL
1551 @kindex C-c DEL
1552 @findex c-hungry-delete-backwards
1553 @findex hungry-delete-backwards (c-)
1554 Delete any amount of whitespace in the backwards direction (regardless
1555 whether hungry-delete mode is enabled or not). This command is bound
1556 to both @kbd{C-c C-@key{DEL}} and @kbd{C-c @key{DEL}}, since the more
1557 natural one, @kbd{C-c C-@key{DEL}}, is sometimes difficult to type at
1558 a character terminal.
1559
1560 @item @kbd{C-c C-d}, @kbd{C-c C-@key{DELETE}}, or @kbd{C-c @key{DELETE}} (@code{c-hungry-delete-forward})
1561 @kindex C-c C-d
1562 @kindex C-c C-<DELETE>
1563 @kindex C-c <DELETE>
1564 @findex c-hungry-delete-forward
1565 @findex hungry-delete-forward (c-)
1566 Delete any amount of whitespace in the forward direction (regardless
1567 whether hungry-delete mode is enabled or not). This command is bound
1568 to both @kbd{C-c C-@key{DELETE}} and @kbd{C-c @key{DELETE}} for the
1569 same reason as for @key{DEL} above.
1570 @end table
1571 @end table
1572
1573 @kindex <delete>
1574 @kindex <backspace>
1575
1576 When we talk about @kbd{@key{DEL}}, and @kbd{@key{DELETE}} above, we
1577 actually do so without connecting them to the physical keys commonly
1578 known as @key{Backspace} and @key{Delete}. The default bindings to
1579 those two keys depends on the flavor of (X)Emacs you are using.
1580
1581 @findex c-electric-delete
1582 @findex electric-delete (c-)
1583 @findex c-hungry-delete
1584 @findex hungry-delete (c-)
1585 @vindex delete-key-deletes-forward
1586 In XEmacs 20.3 and beyond, the @key{Backspace} key is bound to
1587 @code{c-electric-backspace} and the @key{Delete} key is bound to
1588 @code{c-electric-delete}. You control the direction it deletes in by
1589 setting the variable @code{delete-key-deletes-forward}, a standard
1590 XEmacs variable.
1591 @c This variable is encapsulated by XEmacs's (defsubst delete-forward-p ...).
1592 When this variable is non-@code{nil}, @code{c-electric-delete} will do
1593 forward deletion with @code{c-electric-delete-forward}, otherwise it
1594 does backward deletion with @code{c-electric-backspace}. Similarly,
1595 @kbd{C-c @key{Delete}} and @kbd{C-c C-@key{Delete}} are bound to
1596 @code{c-hungry-delete} which is controlled in the same way by
1597 @code{delete-key-deletes-forward}.
1598
1599 @findex normal-erase-is-backspace-mode
1600
1601 Emacs 21 and later automatically binds @key{Backspace} and
1602 @key{Delete} to @kbd{DEL} and @kbd{C-d} according to your environment,
1603 and @ccmode{} extends those bindings to @kbd{C-c C-@key{Backspace}}
1604 etc. If you need to change the bindings through
1605 @code{normal-erase-is-backspace-mode} then @ccmode{} will also adapt
1606 its extended bindings accordingly.
1607
1608 In earlier (X)Emacs versions, @ccmode{} doesn't bind either
1609 @key{Backspace} or @key{Delete} directly. Only the key codes
1610 @kbd{DEL} and @kbd{C-d} are bound, and it's up to the default bindings
1611 to map the physical keys to them. You might need to modify this
1612 yourself if the defaults are unsuitable.
1613
1614 Getting your @key{Backspace} and @key{Delete} keys properly set up can
1615 sometimes be tricky. The information in @ref{DEL Does Not
1616 Delete,,,emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}, might be helpful if you're having
1617 trouble with this in GNU Emacs.
1618
1619
1620 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1621 @node Subword Movement, Other Commands, Hungry WS Deletion, Commands
1622 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1623 @section Subword Movement and Editing
1624 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1625
1626 @cindex nomenclature
1627 @cindex subword
1628 In spite of the GNU Coding Standards, it is popular to name a symbol
1629 by mixing uppercase and lowercase letters, e.g., @samp{GtkWidget},
1630 @samp{EmacsFrameClass}, or @samp{NSGraphicsContext}. Here we call
1631 these mixed case symbols @dfn{nomenclatures}. Also, each capitalized
1632 (or completely uppercase) part of a nomenclature is called a
1633 @dfn{subword}. Here are some examples:
1634
1635 @multitable {@samp{NSGraphicsContext}} {@samp{NS}, @samp{Graphics}, and @samp{Context}}
1636 @c This could be converted to @headitem when we require Texinfo 4.7
1637 @iftex
1638 @item @b{Nomenclature}
1639 @tab @b{Subwords}
1640 @end iftex
1641 @ifnottex
1642 @item Nomenclature
1643 @tab Subwords
1644 @item ---------------------------------------------------------
1645 @end ifnottex
1646 @item @samp{GtkWindow}
1647 @tab @samp{Gtk} and @samp{Window}
1648 @item @samp{EmacsFrameClass}
1649 @tab @samp{Emacs}, @samp{Frame}, and @samp{Class}
1650 @item @samp{NSGraphicsContext}
1651 @tab @samp{NS}, @samp{Graphics}, and @samp{Context}
1652 @end multitable
1653
1654 The subword minor mode replaces the basic word oriented movement and
1655 editing commands with variants that recognize subwords in a
1656 nomenclature and treat them as separate words:
1657
1658 @findex c-forward-subword
1659 @findex forward-subword (c-)
1660 @findex c-backward-subword
1661 @findex backward-subword (c-)
1662 @findex c-mark-subword
1663 @findex mark-subword (c-)
1664 @findex c-kill-subword
1665 @findex kill-subword (c-)
1666 @findex c-backward-kill-subword
1667 @findex backward-kill-subword (c-)
1668 @findex c-transpose-subwords
1669 @findex transpose-subwords (c-)
1670 @findex c-capitalize-subword
1671 @findex capitalize-subword (c-)
1672 @findex c-upcase-subword
1673 @findex upcase-subword (c-)
1674 @findex c-downcase-subword
1675 @findex downcase-subword (c-)
1676 @multitable @columnfractions .20 .40 .40
1677 @c This could be converted to @headitem when we require Texinfo 4.7
1678 @iftex
1679 @item @b{Key} @tab @b{Word oriented command} @tab @b{Subword oriented command}
1680 @end iftex
1681 @ifnottex
1682 @item Key @tab Word oriented command @tab Subword oriented command
1683 @item ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1684 @end ifnottex
1685 @item @kbd{M-f} @tab @code{forward-word} @tab @code{c-forward-subword}
1686 @item @kbd{M-b} @tab @code{backward-word} @tab @code{c-backward-subword}
1687 @item @kbd{M-@@} @tab @code{mark-word} @tab @code{c-mark-subword}
1688 @item @kbd{M-d} @tab @code{kill-word} @tab @code{c-kill-subword}
1689 @item @kbd{M-DEL} @tab @code{backward-kill-word} @tab @code{c-backward-kill-subword}
1690 @item @kbd{M-t} @tab @code{transpose-words} @tab @code{c-transpose-subwords}
1691 @item @kbd{M-c} @tab @code{capitalize-word} @tab @code{c-capitalize-subword}
1692 @item @kbd{M-u} @tab @code{upcase-word} @tab @code{c-upcase-subword}
1693 @item @kbd{M-l} @tab @code{downcase-word} @tab @code{c-downcase-subword}
1694 @end multitable
1695
1696 Note that if you have changed the key bindings for the word oriented
1697 commands in your @file{.emacs} or a similar place, the keys you have
1698 configured are also used for the corresponding subword oriented
1699 commands.
1700
1701 Type @kbd{C-c C-w} to toggle subword mode on and off. To make the
1702 mode turn on automatically, put the following code in your
1703 @file{.emacs}:
1704
1705 @example
1706 (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook
1707 (lambda () (subword-mode 1)))
1708 @end example
1709
1710 As a bonus, you can also use @code{subword-mode} in non-@ccmode{}
1711 buffers by typing @kbd{M-x subword-mode}.
1712
1713 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1714 @node Other Commands, , Subword Movement, Commands
1715 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1716 @section Other Commands
1717 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1718
1719 Here are the various other commands that didn't fit anywhere else:
1720
1721 @table @asis
1722 @item @kbd{C-c .} (@code{c-set-style})
1723 @kindex C-c .
1724 @findex c-set-style
1725 @findex set-style (c-)
1726 Switch to the specified style in the current buffer. Use like this:
1727
1728 @example
1729 @kbd{C-c . @var{style-name} @key{RET}}
1730 @end example
1731
1732 You can use the @key{TAB} in the normal way to do completion on the
1733 style name. Note that all style names are case insensitive, even the
1734 ones you define yourself.
1735
1736 Setting a style in this way does @emph{not} automatically reindent your
1737 file. For commands that you can use to view the effect of your changes,
1738 see @ref{Indentation Commands} and @ref{Filling and Breaking}.
1739
1740 For details of the @ccmode{} style system, see @ref{Styles}.
1741 @item @kbd{C-c :} (@code{c-scope-operator})
1742 @kindex C-c :
1743 @findex c-scope-operator
1744 @findex scope-operator (c-)
1745 In C++, it is also sometimes desirable to insert the double-colon scope
1746 operator without performing the electric behavior of colon insertion.
1747 @kbd{C-c :} does just this.
1748
1749 @item @kbd{C-c C-\} (@code{c-backslash-region})
1750 @kindex C-c C-\
1751 @findex c-backslash-region
1752 @findex backslash-region (c-)
1753 This function inserts and aligns or deletes end-of-line backslashes in
1754 the current region. These are typically used in multi-line macros.
1755
1756 With no prefix argument, it inserts any missing backslashes and aligns
1757 them according to the @code{c-backslash-column} and
1758 @code{c-backslash-max-column} variables. With a prefix argument, it
1759 deletes any backslashes.
1760
1761 The function does not modify blank lines at the start of the region. If
1762 the region ends at the start of a line, it always deletes the backslash
1763 (if any) at the end of the previous line.
1764
1765 To customize the precise workings of this command, @ref{Custom Macros}.
1766 @end table
1767
1768 @noindent
1769 The recommended line breaking function, @code{c-context-line-break}
1770 (@pxref{Filling and Breaking}), is especially nice if you edit
1771 multiline macros frequently. When used inside a macro, it
1772 automatically inserts and adjusts the mandatory backslash at the end
1773 of the line to keep the macro together, and it leaves the point at the
1774 right indentation column for the code. Thus you can write code inside
1775 macros almost exactly as you can elsewhere, without having to bother
1776 with the trailing backslashes.
1777
1778 @table @asis
1779 @item @kbd{C-c C-e} (@code{c-macro-expand})
1780 @kindex C-c C-e
1781 @findex c-macro-expand
1782 @findex macro-expand (c-)
1783 This command expands C, C++, Objective C or Pike macros in the region,
1784 using an appropriate external preprocessor program. Normally it
1785 displays its output in a temporary buffer, but if you give it a prefix
1786 arg (with @kbd{C-u C-c C-e}) it will overwrite the original region
1787 with the expansion.
1788
1789 The command does not work in any of the other modes, and the key
1790 sequence is not bound in these other modes.
1791
1792 @code{c-macro-expand} isn't actually part of @ccmode{}, even though it
1793 is bound to a @ccmode{} key sequence. If you need help setting it up
1794 or have other problems with it, you can either read its source code or
1795 ask for help in the standard (X)Emacs forums.
1796 @end table
1797
1798 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1799 @node Font Locking, Config Basics, Commands, Top
1800 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1801 @chapter Font Locking
1802 @cindex font locking
1803 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1804
1805 @cindex Font Lock mode
1806
1807 @ccmode{} provides font locking for its supported languages by
1808 supplying patterns for use with Font Lock mode. This means that you
1809 get distinct faces on the various syntactic parts such as comments,
1810 strings, keywords and types, which is very helpful in telling them
1811 apart at a glance and discovering syntactic errors. @xref{Font
1812 Lock,,, emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}, for ways to enable font locking in
1813 @ccmode{} buffers.
1814
1815 @strong{Please note:} The font locking in AWK mode is currently not
1816 integrated with the rest of @ccmode{}. Only the last section of this
1817 chapter, @ref{AWK Mode Font Locking}, applies to AWK@. The other
1818 sections apply to the other languages.
1819
1820 @menu
1821 * Font Locking Preliminaries::
1822 * Faces::
1823 * Doc Comments::
1824 * AWK Mode Font Locking::
1825 @end menu
1826
1827
1828 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1829 @node Font Locking Preliminaries, Faces, Font Locking, Font Locking
1830 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1831 @section Font Locking Preliminaries
1832 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1833
1834 The font locking for most of the @ccmode{} languages were provided
1835 directly by the Font Lock package prior to version 5.30 of @ccmode{}.
1836 In the transition to @ccmode{} the patterns have been reworked
1837 completely and are applied uniformly across all the languages except AWK
1838 mode, just like the indentation rules (although each language still has
1839 some peculiarities of its own, of course). Since the languages
1840 previously had completely separate font locking patterns, this means
1841 that it's a bit different in most languages now.
1842
1843 The main goal for the font locking in @ccmode{} is accuracy, to provide
1844 a dependable aid in recognizing the various constructs. Some, like
1845 strings and comments, are easy to recognize while others, like
1846 declarations and types, can be very tricky. @ccmode{} can go to great
1847 lengths to recognize declarations and casts correctly, especially when
1848 the types aren't recognized by standard patterns. This is a fairly
1849 demanding analysis which can be slow on older hardware, and it can
1850 therefore be disabled by choosing a lower decoration level with the
1851 variable @code{font-lock-maximum-decoration} (@pxref{Font Lock,,,
1852 emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}).
1853
1854 @vindex font-lock-maximum-decoration
1855
1856 The decoration levels are used as follows:
1857
1858 @enumerate
1859 @comment 1
1860 @item
1861 Minimal font locking: Fontify only comments, strings and preprocessor
1862 directives (in the languages that use cpp).
1863
1864 @comment 2
1865 @item
1866 Fast font locking: In addition to level 1, fontify keywords, simple
1867 types and declarations that are easy to recognize. The variables
1868 @code{*-font-lock-extra-types} (where @samp{*} is the name of the
1869 language) are used to recognize types (see below). Documentation
1870 comments like Javadoc are fontified according to
1871 @code{c-doc-comment-style} (@pxref{Doc Comments}).
1872
1873 Use this if you think the font locking is too slow. It's the closest
1874 corresponding level to level 3 in the old font lock patterns.
1875
1876 @comment 3
1877 @item
1878 Accurate font locking: Like level 2 but uses a different approach that
1879 can recognize types and declarations much more accurately. The
1880 @code{*-font-lock-extra-types} variables are still used, but user
1881 defined types are recognized correctly anyway in most cases. Therefore
1882 those variables should be fairly restrictive and not contain patterns
1883 that are uncertain.
1884
1885 @cindex Lazy Lock mode
1886 @cindex Just-in-time Lock mode
1887
1888 This level is designed for fairly modern hardware and a font lock
1889 support mode like Lazy Lock or Just-in-time Lock mode that only
1890 fontifies the parts that are actually shown. Fontifying the whole
1891 buffer at once can easily get bothersomely slow even on contemporary
1892 hardware. @xref{Font Lock,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}}.
1893 @end enumerate
1894
1895 @cindex user defined types
1896 @cindex types, user defined
1897
1898 Since user defined types are hard to recognize you can provide
1899 additional regexps to match those you use:
1900
1901 @defopt c-font-lock-extra-types
1902 @defoptx c++-font-lock-extra-types
1903 @defoptx objc-font-lock-extra-types
1904 @defoptx java-font-lock-extra-types
1905 @defoptx idl-font-lock-extra-types
1906 @defoptx pike-font-lock-extra-types
1907 For each language there's a variable @code{*-font-lock-extra-types},
1908 where @samp{*} stands for the language in question. It contains a list
1909 of regexps that matches identifiers that should be recognized as types,
1910 e.g., @samp{\\sw+_t} to recognize all identifiers ending with @samp{_t}
1911 as is customary in C code. Each regexp should not match more than a
1912 single identifier.
1913
1914 The default values contain regexps for many types in standard runtime
1915 libraries that are otherwise difficult to recognize, and patterns for
1916 standard type naming conventions like the @samp{_t} suffix in C and C++.
1917 Java, Objective-C and Pike have as a convention to start class names
1918 with capitals, so there are patterns for that in those languages.
1919
1920 Despite the names of these variables, they are not only used for
1921 fontification but in other places as well where @ccmode{} needs to
1922 recognize types.
1923 @end defopt
1924
1925
1926 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1927 @node Faces, Doc Comments, Font Locking Preliminaries, Font Locking
1928 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1929 @section Faces
1930 @cindex faces
1931 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1932
1933 @ccmode{} attempts to use the standard faces for programming languages
1934 in accordance with their intended purposes as far as possible. No extra
1935 faces are currently provided, with the exception of a replacement face
1936 @code{c-invalid-face} for emacsen that don't provide
1937 @code{font-lock-warning-face}.
1938
1939 @itemize @bullet
1940 @item
1941 @vindex font-lock-comment-face
1942 Normal comments are fontified in @code{font-lock-comment-face}.
1943
1944 @item
1945 @vindex font-lock-doc-face
1946 @vindex font-lock-doc-string-face
1947 @vindex font-lock-comment-face
1948 Comments that are recognized as documentation (@pxref{Doc Comments})
1949 get @code{font-lock-doc-face} (Emacs) or
1950 @code{font-lock-doc-string-face} (XEmacs) if those faces exist. If
1951 they don't then @code{font-lock-comment-face} is used.
1952
1953 @item
1954 @vindex font-lock-string-face
1955 String and character literals are fontified in
1956 @code{font-lock-string-face}.
1957
1958 @item
1959 @vindex font-lock-keyword-face
1960 Keywords are fontified with @code{font-lock-keyword-face}.
1961
1962 @item
1963 @vindex font-lock-function-name-face
1964 @code{font-lock-function-name-face} is used for function names in
1965 declarations and definitions, and classes in those contexts. It's also
1966 used for preprocessor defines with arguments.
1967
1968 @item
1969 @vindex font-lock-variable-name-face
1970 Variables in declarations and definitions, and other identifiers in such
1971 variable contexts, get @code{font-lock-variable-name-face}. It's also
1972 used for preprocessor defines without arguments.
1973
1974 @item
1975 @vindex font-lock-constant-face
1976 @vindex font-lock-reference-face
1977 Builtin constants are fontified in @code{font-lock-constant-face} if it
1978 exists, @code{font-lock-reference-face} otherwise. As opposed to the
1979 preceding two faces, this is used on the names in expressions, and it's
1980 not used in declarations, even if there happen to be a @samp{const} in
1981 them somewhere.
1982
1983 @item
1984 @vindex font-lock-type-face
1985 @code{font-lock-type-face} is put on types (both predefined and user
1986 defined) and classes in type contexts.
1987
1988 @item
1989 @vindex font-lock-constant-face
1990 @vindex font-lock-reference-face
1991 Label identifiers get @code{font-lock-constant-face} if it exists,
1992 @code{font-lock-reference-face} otherwise.
1993
1994 @item
1995 Name qualifiers and identifiers for scope constructs are fontified like
1996 labels.
1997
1998 @item
1999 Special markup inside documentation comments are also fontified like
2000 labels.
2001
2002 @item
2003 @vindex font-lock-preprocessor-face
2004 @vindex font-lock-builtin-face
2005 @vindex font-lock-reference-face
2006 Preprocessor directives get @code{font-lock-preprocessor-face} if it
2007 exists (i.e., XEmacs). In Emacs they get @code{font-lock-builtin-face}
2008 or @code{font-lock-reference-face}, for lack of a closer equivalent.
2009
2010 @item
2011 @vindex font-lock-warning-face
2012 @vindex c-invalid-face
2013 @vindex invalid-face (c-)
2014 Some kinds of syntactic errors are fontified with
2015 @code{font-lock-warning-face} in Emacs. In older XEmacs versions
2016 there's no corresponding standard face, so there a special
2017 @code{c-invalid-face} is used, which is defined to stand out sharply by
2018 default.
2019
2020 Note that it's not used for @samp{#error} or @samp{#warning} directives,
2021 since those aren't syntactic errors in themselves.
2022 @end itemize
2023
2024
2025 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2026 @node Doc Comments, AWK Mode Font Locking, Faces, Font Locking
2027 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2028 @section Documentation Comments
2029 @cindex documentation comments
2030 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2031
2032 There are various tools to supply documentation in the source as
2033 specially structured comments, e.g., the standard Javadoc tool in Java.
2034 @ccmode{} provides an extensible mechanism to fontify such comments and
2035 the special markup inside them.
2036
2037 @defopt c-doc-comment-style
2038 @vindex doc-comment-style (c-)
2039 This is a style variable that specifies which documentation comment
2040 style to recognize, e.g., @code{javadoc} for Javadoc comments.
2041
2042 The value may also be a list of styles, in which case all of them are
2043 recognized simultaneously (presumably with markup cues that don't
2044 conflict).
2045
2046 The value may also be an association list to specify different comment
2047 styles for different languages. The symbol for the major mode is then
2048 looked up in the alist, and the value of that element is interpreted as
2049 above if found. If it isn't found then the symbol @code{other} is looked up
2050 and its value is used instead.
2051
2052 The default value for @code{c-doc-comment-style} is
2053 @w{@code{((java-mode . javadoc) (pike-mode . autodoc) (c-mode . gtkdoc))}}.
2054
2055 Note that @ccmode{} uses this variable to set other variables that
2056 handle fontification etc. That's done at mode initialization or when
2057 you switch to a style which sets this variable. Thus, if you change it
2058 in some other way, e.g., interactively in a CC Mode buffer, you will need
2059 to do @kbd{M-x java-mode} (or whatever mode you're currently using) to
2060 reinitialize.
2061
2062 @findex c-setup-doc-comment-style
2063 @findex setup-doc-comment-style (c-)
2064 Note also that when @ccmode{} starts up, the other variables are
2065 modified before the mode hooks are run. If you change this variable in
2066 a mode hook, you'll have to call @code{c-setup-doc-comment-style}
2067 afterwards to redo that work.
2068 @end defopt
2069
2070 @ccmode{} currently provides handing of the following doc comment
2071 styles:
2072
2073 @table @code
2074 @item javadoc
2075 @cindex Javadoc markup
2076 Javadoc comments, the standard tool in Java.
2077
2078 @item autodoc
2079 @cindex Pike autodoc markup
2080 For Pike autodoc markup, the standard in Pike.
2081
2082 @item gtkdoc
2083 @cindex GtkDoc markup
2084 For GtkDoc markup, widely used in the Gnome community.
2085 @end table
2086
2087 The above is by no means complete. If you'd like to see support for
2088 other doc comment styles, please let us know (@pxref{Mailing Lists and
2089 Bug Reports}).
2090
2091 You can also write your own doc comment fontification support to use
2092 with @code{c-doc-comment-style}: Supply a variable or function
2093 @code{*-font-lock-keywords} where @samp{*} is the name you want to use
2094 in @code{c-doc-comment-style}. If it's a variable, it's prepended to
2095 @code{font-lock-keywords}. If it's a function, it's called at mode
2096 initialization and the result is prepended. For an example, see
2097 @code{javadoc-font-lock-keywords} in @file{cc-fonts.el}.
2098
2099 If you add support for another doc comment style, please consider
2100 contributing it: send a note to @email{bug-cc-mode@@gnu.org}.
2101
2102
2103 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2104 @node AWK Mode Font Locking, , Doc Comments, Font Locking
2105 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2106 @section AWK Mode Font Locking
2107 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2108
2109 The general appearance of font-locking in AWK mode is much like in any
2110 other programming mode. @xref{Faces for Font Lock,,,elisp, GNU Emacs
2111 Lisp Reference Manual}.
2112
2113 The following faces are, however, used in a non-standard fashion in
2114 AWK mode:
2115
2116 @table @asis
2117 @item @code{font-lock-variable-name-face}
2118 This face was intended for variable declarations. Since variables are
2119 not declared in AWK, this face is used instead for AWK system
2120 variables (such as @code{NF}) and ``Special File Names'' (such as
2121 @code{"/dev/stderr"}).
2122
2123 @item @code{font-lock-builtin-face} (Emacs)/@code{font-lock-preprocessor-face} (XEmacs)
2124 This face is normally used for preprocessor directives in @ccmode{}.
2125 There are no such things in AWK, so this face is used instead for
2126 standard functions (such as @code{match}).
2127
2128 @item @code{font-lock-string-face}
2129 As well as being used for strings, including localizable strings,
2130 (delimited by @samp{"} and @samp{_"}), this face is also used for AWK
2131 regular expressions (delimited by @samp{/}).
2132
2133 @item @code{font-lock-warning-face} (Emacs)/@code{c-invalid-face} (XEmacs)
2134 This face highlights the following syntactically invalid AWK
2135 constructs:
2136
2137 @itemize @bullet
2138 @item
2139 An unterminated string or regular expression. Here the opening
2140 delimiter (@samp{"} or @samp{/} or @samp{_"}) is displayed in
2141 @code{font-lock-warning-face}. This is most noticeable when typing in a
2142 new string/regular expression into a buffer, when the warning-face
2143 serves as a continual reminder to terminate the construct.
2144
2145 AWK mode fontifies unterminated strings/regular expressions
2146 differently from other modes: Only the text up to the end of the line
2147 is fontified as a string (escaped newlines being handled correctly),
2148 rather than the text up to the next string quote.
2149
2150 @item
2151 A space between the function name and opening parenthesis when calling
2152 a user function. The last character of the function name and the
2153 opening parenthesis are highlighted. This font-locking rule will
2154 spuriously highlight a valid concatenation expression where an
2155 identifier precedes a parenthesized expression. Unfortunately.
2156
2157 @item
2158 Whitespace following the @samp{\} in what otherwise looks like an
2159 escaped newline. The @samp{\} is highlighted.
2160 @end itemize
2161 @end table
2162
2163
2164 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2165 @node Config Basics, Custom Filling and Breaking, Font Locking, Top
2166 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2167 @chapter Configuration Basics
2168 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2169
2170 @cindex Emacs Initialization File
2171 @cindex Configuration
2172 You configure @ccmode{} by setting Lisp variables and calling (and
2173 perhaps writing) Lisp functions@footnote{DON'T PANIC!!! This isn't
2174 difficult.}, which is usually done by adding code to an Emacs
2175 initialization file. This file might be @file{site-start.el} or
2176 @file{.emacs} or @file{init.el} or @file{default.el} or perhaps some
2177 other file. @xref{Init File,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}}. For
2178 the sake of conciseness, we just call this file ``your @file{.emacs}''
2179 throughout the rest of the manual.
2180
2181 Several of these variables (currently 16), are known collectively as
2182 @dfn{style variables}. @ccmode{} provides a special mechanism, known
2183 as @dfn{styles} to make it easier to set these variables as a group,
2184 to ``inherit'' settings from one style into another, and so on. Style
2185 variables remain ordinary Lisp variables, whose values can be read and
2186 changed independently of the style system. @xref{Style Variables}.
2187
2188 There are several ways you can write the code, depending on the
2189 precise effect you want---they are described further down on this page.
2190 If you are new to @ccmode{}, we suggest you begin with the simplest
2191 method, ``Top-level commands or the customization interface''.
2192
2193 If you make conflicting settings in several of these ways, the way
2194 that takes precedence is the one that appears latest in this list:
2195 @itemize @w{}
2196 @item
2197 @table @asis
2198 @item Style
2199 @itemx File Style@footnote{In earlier versions of @ccmode{}, a File Style setting took precedence over any other setting apart from a File Local Variable setting.}
2200 @itemx Top-level command or ``customization interface''
2201 @itemx Hook
2202 @itemx File Local Variable setting
2203 @end table
2204 @end itemize
2205
2206 Here is a summary of the different ways of writing your configuration
2207 settings:
2208
2209 @table @asis
2210 @item Top-level commands or the ``customization interface''
2211 Most simply, you can write @code{setq} and similar commands at the top
2212 level of your @file{.emacs} file. When you load a @ccmode{} buffer,
2213 it initializes its configuration from these global values (at least,
2214 for those settings you have given values to), so it makes sense to
2215 have these @code{setq} commands run @emph{before} @ccmode{} is first
2216 initialized---in particular, before any call to @code{desktop-read}
2217 (@pxref{Saving Emacs Sessions,,, emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}). For
2218 example, you might set c-basic-offset thus:
2219
2220 @example
2221 (setq c-basic-offset 4)
2222 @end example
2223
2224 You can use the more user friendly Customization interface instead,
2225 but this manual does not cover in detail how that works. To do this,
2226 start by typing @kbd{M-x customize-group @key{RET} c @key{RET}}.
2227 @xref{Easy Customization,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}}.
2228 @c The following note really belongs in the Emacs manual.
2229 Emacs normally writes the customizations at the end of your
2230 @file{.emacs} file. If you use @code{desktop-read}, you should edit
2231 your @file{.emacs} to place the call to @code{desktop-read} @emph{after}
2232 the customizations.
2233
2234 The first initialization of @ccmode{} puts a snapshot of the
2235 configuration settings into the special style @code{user}.
2236 @xref{Built-in Styles}.
2237
2238 For basic use of Emacs, either of these ways of configuring is
2239 adequate. However, the settings are then the same in all @ccmode{}
2240 buffers and it can be clumsy to communicate them between programmers.
2241 For more flexibility, you'll want to use one (or both) of @ccmode{}'s
2242 more sophisticated facilities, hooks and styles.
2243
2244 @item Hooks
2245 An Emacs @dfn{hook} is a place to put Lisp functions that you want
2246 Emacs to execute later in specific circumstances.
2247 @xref{Hooks,,,@lispref{}, @lispreftitle{}}. @ccmode{} supplies a main
2248 hook and a language-specific hook for each language it supports; any
2249 functions you put onto these hooks get executed as the last part of a
2250 buffer's initialization. Typically you put most of your customization
2251 within the main hook, and use the language-specific hooks to vary the
2252 customization settings between language modes. For example, if you
2253 wanted different (non-standard) values of @code{c-basic-offset} in C
2254 Mode and Java Mode buffers, you could do it like this:
2255
2256 @example
2257 @group
2258 (defun my-c-mode-hook ()
2259 (setq c-basic-offset 3))
2260 (add-hook 'c-mode-hook 'my-c-mode-hook)
2261
2262 (defun my-java-mode-hook ()
2263 (setq c-basic-offset 6))
2264 (add-hook 'java-mode-hook 'my-java-mode-hook)
2265 @end group
2266 @end example
2267
2268 See @ref{CC Hooks} for more details on the use of @ccmode{} hooks.
2269
2270 @item Styles
2271 A @ccmode{} @dfn{style} is a coherent collection of customizations
2272 with a name. At any time, exactly one style is active in each
2273 @ccmode{} buffer, either the one you have selected or a default.
2274 @ccmode{} is delivered with several existing styles. Additionally,
2275 you can create your own styles, possibly based on these existing
2276 styles. If you worked in a programming team called the ``Free
2277 Group'', which had its own coding standards, you might well have this
2278 in your @file{.emacs} file:
2279
2280 @example
2281 (setq c-default-style '((java-mode . "java")
2282 (awk-mode . "awk")
2283 (other . "free-group-style")))
2284 @end example
2285
2286 See @ref{Styles} for fuller details on using @ccmode{} styles and how
2287 to create them.
2288
2289 @item File Local Variable setting
2290 A @dfn{file local variable setting} is a setting which applies to an
2291 individual source file. You put this in a @dfn{local variables list},
2292 a special block at the end of the source file (@pxref{Specifying File
2293 Variables,,,@emacsman{}}).
2294
2295 @item File Styles
2296 A @dfn{file style} is a rarely used variant of the ``style'' mechanism
2297 described above, which applies to an individual source file.
2298 @xref{File Styles}. You use this by setting certain special variables
2299 in a local variables list (@pxref{Specifying File
2300 Variables,,,@emacsman{}}).
2301
2302 @item Hooks with Styles
2303 For ultimate flexibility, you can use hooks and styles together. For
2304 example, if your team were developing a product which required a
2305 Linux driver, you'd probably want to use the ``linux'' style for the
2306 driver, and your own team's style for the rest of the code. You
2307 could achieve this with code like this in your @file{.emacs}:
2308
2309 @example
2310 @group
2311 (defun my-c-mode-hook ()
2312 (c-set-style
2313 (if (and (buffer-file-name)
2314 (string-match "/usr/src/linux" (buffer-file-name)))
2315 "linux"
2316 "free-group-style")))
2317 (add-hook 'c-mode-hook 'my-c-mode-hook)
2318 @end group
2319 @end example
2320
2321 In a programming team, a hook is a also a good place for each member
2322 to put his own personal preferences. For example, you might be the
2323 only person in your team who likes Auto-newline minor mode. You could
2324 have it enabled by default by placing the following in your
2325 @file{.emacs}:
2326
2327 @example
2328 @group
2329 (defun my-turn-on-auto-newline ()
2330 (c-toggle-auto-newline 1))
2331 (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook 'my-turn-on-auto-newline)
2332 @end group
2333 @end example
2334 @end table
2335
2336 @menu
2337 * CC Hooks::
2338 * Style Variables::
2339 * Styles::
2340 @end menu
2341
2342 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2343 @node CC Hooks, Style Variables, Config Basics, Config Basics
2344 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2345 @section Hooks
2346 @cindex mode hooks
2347 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2348 @c The node name is "CC Hooks" rather than "Hooks" because of a bug in
2349 @c some older versions of Info, e.g., the info.el in GNU Emacs 21.3.
2350 @c If you go to "Config Basics" and hit <CR> on the xref to "CC
2351 @c Hooks" the function Info-follow-reference searches for "*Note: CC
2352 @c Hooks" from the beginning of the page. If this node were instead
2353 @c named "Hooks", that search would spuriously find "*Note:
2354 @c Hooks(elisp)" and go to the wrong node.
2355
2356 @ccmode{} provides several hooks that you can use to customize the
2357 mode for your coding style. The main hook is
2358 @code{c-mode-common-hook}; typically, you'll put the bulk of your
2359 customizations here. In addition, each language mode has its own
2360 hook, allowing you to fine tune your settings individually for the
2361 different @ccmode{} languages, and there is a package initialization
2362 hook. Finally, there is @code{c-special-indent-hook}, which enables
2363 you to solve anomalous indentation problems. It is described in
2364 @ref{Other Indentation}, not here. All these hooks adhere to the
2365 standard Emacs conventions.
2366
2367 When you open a buffer, @ccmode{} first initializes it with the
2368 currently active style (@pxref{Styles}). Then it calls
2369 @code{c-mode-common-hook}, and finally it calls the language-specific
2370 hook. Thus, any style settings done in these hooks will override
2371 those set by @code{c-default-style}.
2372
2373 @defvar c-initialization-hook
2374 @vindex initialization-hook (c-)
2375 Hook run only once per Emacs session, when @ccmode{} is initialized.
2376 This is a good place to change key bindings (or add new ones) in any
2377 of the @ccmode{} key maps. @xref{Sample Init File}.
2378 @end defvar
2379
2380 @defvar c-mode-common-hook
2381 @vindex mode-common-hook (c-)
2382 Common hook across all languages. It's run immediately before the
2383 language specific hook.
2384 @end defvar
2385
2386 @defvar c-mode-hook
2387 @defvarx c++-mode-hook
2388 @defvarx objc-mode-hook
2389 @defvarx java-mode-hook
2390 @defvarx idl-mode-hook
2391 @defvarx pike-mode-hook
2392 @defvarx awk-mode-hook
2393 The language specific mode hooks. The appropriate one is run as the
2394 last thing when you enter that language mode.
2395 @end defvar
2396
2397 Although these hooks are variables defined in @ccmode{}, you can give
2398 them values before @ccmode{}'s code is loaded---indeed, this is the
2399 only way to use @code{c-initialization-hook}. Their values aren't
2400 overwritten when @ccmode{} gets loaded.
2401
2402 Here's a simplified example of what you can add to your @file{.emacs}
2403 file to do things whenever any @ccmode{} language is edited. See the
2404 Emacs manuals for more information on customizing Emacs via hooks.
2405 @xref{Sample Init File}, for a more complete sample @file{.emacs}
2406 file.
2407
2408 @example
2409 (defun my-c-mode-common-hook ()
2410 ;; my customizations for all of c-mode and related modes
2411 (no-case-fold-search)
2412 )
2413 (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook 'my-c-mode-common-hook)
2414 @end example
2415
2416 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2417 @node Style Variables, Styles, CC Hooks, Config Basics
2418 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2419 @section Style Variables
2420 @cindex styles
2421 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2422
2423 @cindex style variables
2424 The variables that @ccmode{}'s style system control are called
2425 @dfn{style variables}. Note that style variables are ordinary Lisp
2426 variables, which the style system initializes; you can change their
2427 values at any time (e.g., in a hook function). The style system can
2428 also set other variables, to some extent. @xref{Styles}.
2429
2430 @dfn{Style variables} are handled specially in several ways:
2431
2432 @itemize @bullet
2433 @item
2434 Style variables are by default buffer-local variables. However, they
2435 can instead be made global by setting
2436 @code{c-style-variables-are-local-p} to @code{nil} before @ccmode{} is
2437 initialized.
2438
2439 @item
2440 @vindex c-old-style-variable-behavior
2441 @vindex old-style-variable-behavior (c-)
2442 The default global binding of any style variable (with two exceptions
2443 - see below) is the special symbol @code{set-from-style}. When the
2444 style system initializes a buffer-local copy of a style variable for a
2445 @ccmode{} buffer, if its global binding is still that symbol then it
2446 will be set from the current style. Otherwise it will retain its
2447 global default@footnote{This is a big change from versions of
2448 @ccmode{} earlier than 5.26, where such settings would get overridden
2449 by the style system unless special precautions were taken. That was
2450 changed since it was counterintuitive and confusing, especially to
2451 novice users. If your configuration depends on the old overriding
2452 behavior, you can set the variable
2453 @code{c-old-style-variable-behavior} to non-@code{nil}.}. This
2454 ``otherwise'' happens, for example, when you've set the variable with
2455 @code{setq} at the top level of your @file{.emacs} (@pxref{Config
2456 Basics}).
2457
2458 @item
2459 The style variable @code{c-offsets-alist} (@pxref{c-offsets-alist}) is
2460 an association list with an element for each syntactic symbol. It's
2461 handled a little differently from the other style variables. It's
2462 default global binding is the empty list @code{nil}, rather than
2463 @code{set-from-style}. Before the style system is initialized, you
2464 can add individual elements to @code{c-offsets-alist} by calling
2465 @code{c-set-offset} (@pxref{c-offsets-alist}) just like you would set
2466 other style variables with @code{setq}. Those elements will then
2467 prevail when the style system later initializes a buffer-local copy of
2468 @code{c-offsets-alist}.
2469
2470 @item
2471 The style variable @code{c-special-indent-hook} is also handled in a
2472 special way. Styles can only add functions to this hook, not remove
2473 them, so any global settings you put on it are always
2474 preserved@footnote{This did not change in version 5.26.}. The value
2475 you give this variable in a style definition can be either a function
2476 or a list of functions.
2477
2478 @item
2479 The global bindings of the style variables get captured in the special
2480 @code{user} style when the style system is first initialized.
2481 @xref{Built-in Styles}, for details.
2482 @end itemize
2483
2484 The style variables are:@*
2485 @code{c-indent-comment-alist},
2486 @code{c-indent-comments-syntactically-p} (@pxref{Indentation
2487 Commands});@*
2488 @code{c-doc-comment-style} (@pxref{Doc Comments});@*
2489 @code{c-block-comment-prefix}, @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp}
2490 (@pxref{Custom Filling and Breaking});@*
2491 @code{c-hanging-braces-alist} (@pxref{Hanging Braces});@*
2492 @code{c-hanging-colons-alist} (@pxref{Hanging Colons});@*
2493 @code{c-hanging-semi&comma-criteria} (@pxref{Hanging Semicolons and
2494 Commas});@*
2495 @code{c-cleanup-list} (@pxref{Clean-ups});@*
2496 @code{c-basic-offset} (@pxref{Customizing Indentation});@*
2497 @code{c-offsets-alist} (@pxref{c-offsets-alist});@*
2498 @code{c-comment-only-line-offset} (@pxref{Comment Line-Up});@*
2499 @code{c-special-indent-hook}, @code{c-label-minimum-indentation}
2500 (@pxref{Other Indentation});@*
2501 @code{c-backslash-column}, @code{c-backslash-max-column}
2502 (@pxref{Custom Macros}).
2503
2504 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2505 @node Styles, , Style Variables, Config Basics
2506 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2507 @section Styles
2508 @cindex styles
2509 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2510
2511 By @dfn{style} we mean the layout of the code---things like how many
2512 columns to indent a block of code, whether an opening brace gets
2513 indented to the level of the code it encloses, or of the construct
2514 that introduces it, or ``hangs'' at the end of a line.
2515
2516 Most people only need to edit code formatted in just a few well-defined
2517 and consistent styles. For example, their organization might impose a
2518 ``blessed'' style that all its programmers must conform to. Similarly,
2519 people who work on GNU software will have to use the GNU coding style.
2520 Some shops are more lenient, allowing a variety of coding styles, and as
2521 programmers come and go, there could be a number of styles in use. For
2522 this reason, @ccmode{} makes it convenient for you to set up logical
2523 groupings of customizations called @dfn{styles}, associate a single name
2524 for any particular style, and pretty easily start editing new or
2525 existing code using these styles.
2526
2527 As an alternative to writing a style definition yourself, you can have
2528 @ccmode{} @dfn{guess} (at least part of) your style by looking at an
2529 already formatted piece of your code, @ref{Guessing the Style}.
2530
2531 @menu
2532 * Built-in Styles::
2533 * Choosing a Style::
2534 * Adding Styles::
2535 * Guessing the Style::
2536 * File Styles::
2537 @end menu
2538
2539 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2540 @node Built-in Styles, Choosing a Style, Styles, Styles
2541 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2542 @subsection Built-in Styles
2543 @cindex styles, built-in
2544 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2545
2546 If you're lucky, one of @ccmode{}'s built-in styles might be just
2547 what you're looking for. These are:
2548
2549 @table @code
2550 @item gnu
2551 @cindex GNU style
2552 Coding style blessed by the Free Software Foundation
2553 for C code in GNU programs.
2554
2555 @item k&r
2556 @cindex K&R style
2557 The classic Kernighan and Ritchie style for C code.
2558
2559 @item bsd
2560 @cindex BSD style
2561 Also known as ``Allman style'' after Eric Allman.
2562
2563 @item whitesmith
2564 @cindex Whitesmith style
2565 Popularized by the examples that came with Whitesmiths C, an early
2566 commercial C compiler.
2567
2568 @item stroustrup
2569 @cindex Stroustrup style
2570 The classic Stroustrup style for C++ code.
2571
2572 @item ellemtel
2573 @cindex Ellemtel style
2574 Popular C++ coding standards as defined by ``Programming in C++, Rules
2575 and Recommendations,'' Erik Nyquist and Mats Henricson,
2576 Ellemtel@footnote{This document is available at
2577 @uref{http://www.doc.ic.ac.uk/lab/cplus/c++.rules/} among other
2578 places.}.
2579 @c N.B. This URL was still valid at 2005/8/28 (ACM).
2580
2581 @item linux
2582 @cindex Linux style
2583 C coding standard for Linux (the kernel).
2584
2585 @item python
2586 @cindex Python style
2587 C coding standard for Python extension modules@footnote{Python is a
2588 high level scripting language with a C/C++ foreign function interface.
2589 For more information, see @uref{http://www.python.org/}.}.
2590
2591 @item java
2592 @cindex Java style
2593 The style for editing Java code. Note that the default
2594 value for @code{c-default-style} installs this style when you enter
2595 @code{java-mode}.
2596
2597 @item awk
2598 @cindex AWK style
2599 The style for editing AWK code. Note that the default value for
2600 @code{c-default-style} installs this style when you enter
2601 @code{awk-mode}.
2602
2603 @item user
2604 @cindex User style
2605 This is a special style created by you. It consists of the factory
2606 defaults for all the style variables as modified by the customizations
2607 you do either with the Customization interface or by writing
2608 @code{setq}s and @code{c-set-offset}s at the top level of your
2609 @file{.emacs} file (@pxref{Config Basics}). The style system creates
2610 this style as part of its initialization and doesn't modify it
2611 afterwards.
2612 @end table
2613
2614
2615 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2616 @node Choosing a Style, Adding Styles, Built-in Styles, Styles
2617 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2618 @subsection Choosing a Style
2619 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2620
2621 When you create a new buffer, its style will be set from
2622 @code{c-default-style}. The factory default is the style @code{gnu},
2623 except in Java and AWK modes where it's @code{java} and @code{awk}.
2624
2625 Remember that if you set a style variable with the Customization
2626 interface or at the top level of your @file{.emacs} file before the
2627 style system is initialized (@pxref{Config Basics}), this setting will
2628 override the one that the style system would have given the variable.
2629
2630 To set a buffer's style interactively, use the command @kbd{C-c .}
2631 (@pxref{Other Commands}). To set it from a file's local variable
2632 list, @ref{File Styles}.
2633
2634 @defopt c-default-style
2635 @vindex default-style (c-)
2636 This variable specifies which style to install by default in new
2637 buffers. It takes either a style name string, or an association list
2638 of major mode symbols to style names:
2639
2640 @enumerate
2641 @item
2642 When @code{c-default-style} is a string, it must be an existing style
2643 name. This style is then used for all modes.
2644
2645 @item
2646 When @code{c-default-style} is an association list, the mode language
2647 is looked up to find a style name string.
2648
2649 @item
2650 If @code{c-default-style} is an association list where the mode
2651 language mode isn't found then the special symbol @samp{other} is
2652 looked up. If it's found then the associated style is used.
2653
2654 @item
2655 If @samp{other} is not found then the @samp{gnu} style is used.
2656 @end enumerate
2657
2658 In all cases, the style described in @code{c-default-style} is installed
2659 @emph{before} the language hooks are run, so you can always override
2660 this setting by including an explicit call to @code{c-set-style} in your
2661 language mode hook, or in @code{c-mode-common-hook}.
2662
2663 The standard value of @code{c-default-style} is @w{@code{((java-mode
2664 . "java") (awk-mode . "awk") (other . "gnu"))}}.
2665 @end defopt
2666
2667 @defvar c-indentation-style
2668 @vindex indentation-style (c-)
2669 This variable always contains the buffer's current style name, as a
2670 string.
2671 @end defvar
2672
2673 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2674 @node Adding Styles, Guessing the Style, Choosing a Style, Styles
2675 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2676 @subsection Adding and Amending Styles
2677 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2678
2679 If none of the built-in styles is appropriate, you'll probably want to
2680 create a new @dfn{style definition}, possibly based on an existing
2681 style. To do this, put the new style's settings into a list with the
2682 following format; the list can then be passed as an argument to the
2683 function @code{c-add-style}. You can see an example of a style
2684 definition in @ref{Sample Init File}.
2685
2686 @cindex style definition
2687 @c @defvr {List} style definition
2688 @table @asis
2689 @item Structure of a Style Definition List
2690 ([@var{base-style}] [(@var{variable} . @var{value}) @dots{}])
2691
2692 Optional @var{base-style}, if present, must be a string which is the
2693 name of the @dfn{base style} from which this style inherits. At most
2694 one @var{base-style} is allowed in a style definition. If
2695 @var{base-style} is not specified, the style inherits from the table
2696 of factory default values@footnote{This table is stored internally in
2697 the variable c-fallback-style.} instead. All styles eventually
2698 inherit from this internal table. Style loops generate errors. The
2699 list of pre-existing styles can be seen in @ref{Built-in Styles}.
2700
2701 The dotted pairs (@var{variable} . @var{value}) each consist of a
2702 variable and the value it is to be set to when the style is later
2703 activated.@footnote{Note that if the variable has been given a value
2704 by the Customization interface or a @code{setq} at the top level of
2705 your @file{.emacs}, this value will override the one the style system
2706 tries to give it. @xref{Config Basics}.} The variable can be either a
2707 @ccmode{} style variable or an arbitrary Emacs variable. In the
2708 latter case, it is @emph{not} made buffer-local by the @ccmode{} style
2709 system.
2710 @c @end defvr
2711
2712 Two variables are treated specially in the dotted pair list:
2713
2714 @table @code
2715 @item c-offsets-alist
2716 The value is in turn a list of dotted pairs of the form
2717
2718 @example
2719 (@r{@var{syntactic-symbol}} . @r{@var{offset}})
2720 @end example
2721
2722 as described in @ref{c-offsets-alist}. These are passed to
2723 @code{c-set-offset} so there is no need to set every syntactic symbol
2724 in your style, only those that are different from the inherited style.
2725
2726 @item c-special-indent-hook
2727 The value is added to @code{c-special-indent-hook} using
2728 @code{add-hook}, so any functions already on it are kept. If the value
2729 is a list, each element of the list is added with @code{add-hook}.
2730 @end table
2731 @end table
2732
2733 Styles are kept in the @code{c-style-alist} variable, but you
2734 should never modify this variable directly. Instead, @ccmode{}
2735 provides the function @code{c-add-style} for this purpose.
2736
2737 @defun c-add-style stylename description &optional set-p
2738 @findex add-style (c-)
2739 Add or update a style called @var{stylename}, a string.
2740 @var{description} is the new style definition in the form described
2741 above. If @var{stylename} already exists in @code{c-style-alist} then
2742 it is replaced by @var{description}. (Note, this replacement is
2743 total. The old style is @emph{not} merged into the new one.)
2744 Otherwise, a new style is added.
2745
2746 If the optional @var{set-p} is non-@code{nil} then the new style is
2747 applied to the current buffer as well. The use of this facility is
2748 deprecated and it might be removed from @ccmode{} in a future release.
2749 You should use @code{c-set-style} instead.
2750
2751 The sample @file{.emacs} file provides a concrete example of how a new
2752 style can be added and automatically set. @xref{Sample Init File}.
2753 @end defun
2754
2755 @defvar c-style-alist
2756 @vindex style-alist (c-)
2757 This is the variable that holds the definitions for the styles. It
2758 should not be changed directly; use @code{c-add-style} instead.
2759 @end defvar
2760
2761 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2762 @node Guessing the Style, File Styles, Adding Styles, Styles
2763 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2764 @subsection Guessing the Style
2765 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2766
2767 Instead of specifying a style, you can get @ccmode{} to @dfn{guess}
2768 your style by examining an already formatted code buffer. @ccmode{}
2769 then determines the ''most frequent'' offset (@pxref{c-offsets-alist})
2770 for each of the syntactic symbols (@pxref{Indentation Engine Basics})
2771 encountered in the buffer, and the ''most frequent'' value of
2772 c-basic-offset (@pxref{Customizing Indentation}), then merges the
2773 current style with these ''guesses'' to form a new style. This
2774 combined style is known as the @dfn{guessed style}.
2775
2776 To do this, call @code{c-guess} (or one of the other 5 guessing
2777 commands) on your sample buffer. The analysis of your code may take
2778 some time.
2779
2780 You can then set the guessed style in any @ccmode{} buffer with
2781 @code{c-guess-install}. You can display the style with
2782 @code{c-guess-view}, and preserve it by copying it into your
2783 @file{.emacs} for future use, preferably after editing it.
2784
2785 @table @asis
2786 @item @kbd{M-x c-guess-no-install}
2787 @itemx @kbd{M-x c-guess-buffer-no-install}
2788 @itemx @kbd{M-x c-guess-region-no-install}
2789 @findex c-guess-no-install
2790 @findex c-guess-buffer-no-install
2791 @findex c-guess-region-no-install
2792 @findex guess-no-install (c-)
2793 @findex guess-buffer-no-install (c-)
2794 @findex guess-region-no-install (c-)
2795 These commands analyze a part of the current buffer and guess the
2796 style from it.
2797
2798 The part of the buffer examined is either the region
2799 (@code{c-guess-region-no-install}), the entire buffer
2800 (@code{c-guess-buffer-no-install}), or the first
2801 @code{c-guess-region-max} bytes (@code{c-guess-no-install}).
2802
2803 Each of these commands can be given an optional prefix argument. This
2804 instructs @ccmode{} to combine the new guesses with the current
2805 guesses before forming the guessed style.
2806 @end table
2807
2808 @table @asis
2809 @item @kbd{M-x c-guess}
2810 @itemx @kbd{M-x c-guess-buffer}
2811 @itemx @kbd{M-x c-guess-region}
2812 @findex c-guess
2813 @findex c-guess-buffer
2814 @findex c-guess-region
2815 @findex guess (c-)
2816 @findex guess-buffer (c-)
2817 @findex guess-region (c-)
2818 These commands analyze a part of the current buffer, guess the style
2819 from it, then install the guessed style on the buffer. The guessed
2820 style is given a name based on the buffer's absolute file name, and
2821 you can then set this style on any @ccmode{} buffer with @kbd{C-c .}.
2822
2823 The part of the buffer examined is either the region
2824 (@code{c-guess-region}), the entire buffer (@code{c-guess-buffer}), or
2825 the first @code{c-guess-region-max} bytes (@code{c-guess}).
2826
2827 Each of these commands can be given an optional prefix argument. This
2828 instructs @ccmode{} to combine the new guesses with the current
2829 guesses before forming the guessed style.
2830 @end table
2831
2832 @defopt c-guess-region-max
2833 @vindex guess-region-max (c-)
2834 This variable, default 50000, is the size in bytes of the buffer
2835 portion examined by c-guess and c-guess-no-install. If set to
2836 @code{nil}, the entire buffer is examined.
2837 @end defopt
2838
2839 @defopt c-guess-offset-threshold
2840 @vindex guess-offset-threshold (c-)
2841 This variable, default 10, is the maximum offset, either outwards or
2842 inwards, which will be taken into account by the analysis process.
2843 Any offset bigger than this will be ignored. For no limit, set this
2844 variable to a large number.
2845 @end defopt
2846
2847 @table @asis
2848 @item @kbd{M-x c-guess-install}
2849 @findex c-guess-install
2850 @findex guess-install (c-)
2851
2852 Set the current buffer's style to the guessed style. This prompts you
2853 to enter an optional new style name to give to the guessed style. By
2854 default, this name is based on the buffer's absolute file name. You
2855 can then use this style like any other.
2856
2857 @item @kbd{M-x c-guess-view}
2858 @findex c-guess-view
2859 @findex guess-view (c-)
2860 Display the most recently guessed style in a temporary buffer. This
2861 display is in the form of a @code{c-add-style} form (@pxref{Adding
2862 Styles}) which can be easily copied to your @file{.emacs}. You will
2863 probably want to edit it first.
2864
2865 The display of the guessed style contains these elements:
2866
2867 @table @asis
2868 @item Placeholder Name
2869 You should replace this with a style name of your own.
2870 @item Parent Style
2871 The style current when the guessing began, from which the guessed
2872 style inherits (@pxref{Config Basics}) the settings which weren't
2873 guessed.
2874 @item Guessed Offsets
2875 These are the core result of the guessing process. Each of them is
2876 marked by a comment.
2877 @item Inherited Offsets
2878 These are syntactic offsets which have been taken over from the parent
2879 style. To avoid possible future conflicts, you should remove either
2880 these offsets or the parent style name.
2881 @end table
2882 @end table
2883
2884 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2885 @node File Styles, , Guessing the Style, Styles
2886 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2887 @subsection File Styles
2888 @cindex styles, file local
2889 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2890
2891 @cindex file local variables
2892
2893 The Emacs manual describes how you can customize certain variables on a
2894 per-file basis by including a @dfn{file local variable} block at the end
2895 of the file (@pxref{File Variables,, Local Variables in Files,@emacsman{},
2896 @emacsmantitle{}}).
2897
2898 So far, you've only seen a functional interface for setting styles in
2899 @ccmode{}, and this can't be used here. @ccmode{} fills the gap by
2900 providing two variables for use in a file's local variable list.
2901 Don't use them anywhere else! These allow you to customize the style
2902 on a per-file basis:
2903
2904 @defvar c-file-style
2905 @vindex file-style (c-)
2906 Set this variable to a style name string in the Local Variables list.
2907 From now on, when you visit the file, @ccmode{} will automatically set
2908 the file's style to this one using @code{c-set-style}.
2909 @end defvar
2910
2911 @defvar c-file-offsets
2912 @vindex file-offsets (c-)
2913 Set this variable (in the Local Variables list) to an association list
2914 of the same format as @code{c-offsets-alist}. From now on, when you
2915 visit the file, @ccmode{} will automatically institute these offsets
2916 using @code{c-set-offset}.
2917 @end defvar
2918
2919 Note that file style settings (i.e., @code{c-file-style}) are applied
2920 before file offset settings
2921 (i.e., @code{c-file-offsets})@footnote{Also, if either of these are set
2922 in a file's local variable section, all the style variable values are
2923 made local to that buffer, even if
2924 @code{c-style-variables-are-local-p} is @code{nil}. Since this
2925 variable is virtually always non-@code{nil} anyhow, you're unlikely to
2926 notice this effect.}.
2927
2928 If you set any variable by the file local variables mechanism, that
2929 setting takes priority over all other settings, even those in your
2930 mode hooks (@pxref{CC Hooks}). Any individual setting of a variable
2931 will override one made through @code{c-file-style} or
2932 @code{c-file-offsets}.
2933 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2934 @node Custom Filling and Breaking, Custom Auto-newlines, Config Basics, Top
2935 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2936 @chapter Customizing Filling and Line Breaking
2937 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2938
2939 Since there's a lot of normal text in comments and string literals,
2940 @ccmode{} provides features to edit these like in text mode. It does
2941 this by hooking in on the different line breaking functions and tuning
2942 relevant variables as necessary.
2943
2944 @vindex c-comment-prefix-regexp
2945 @vindex comment-prefix-regexp (c-)
2946 @cindex comment line prefix
2947 @vindex comment-start
2948 @vindex comment-end
2949 @vindex comment-start-skip
2950 @vindex paragraph-start
2951 @vindex paragraph-separate
2952 @vindex paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix
2953 @vindex adaptive-fill-mode
2954 @vindex adaptive-fill-regexp
2955 @vindex adaptive-fill-first-line-regexp
2956 To make Emacs recognize comments and treat text in them as normal
2957 paragraphs, @ccmode{} makes several standard
2958 variables@footnote{@code{comment-start}, @code{comment-end},
2959 @code{comment-start-skip}, @code{paragraph-start},
2960 @code{paragraph-separate}, @code{paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix},
2961 @code{adaptive-fill-mode}, @code{adaptive-fill-regexp}, and
2962 @code{adaptive-fill-first-line-regexp}.} buffer-local and modifies them
2963 according to the language syntax and the comment line prefix.
2964
2965 @defopt c-comment-prefix-regexp
2966 @vindex comment-prefix-regexp (c-)
2967 This style variable contains the regexp used to recognize the
2968 @dfn{comment line prefix}, which is the line decoration that starts
2969 every line in a comment. The variable is either the comment line
2970 prefix itself, or (more usually) an association list with different
2971 values for different languages. The symbol for the major mode is
2972 looked up in the alist to get the regexp for the language, and if it
2973 isn't found then the special symbol @samp{other} is looked up instead.
2974
2975 When a comment line gets divided by @kbd{M-j} or the like, @ccmode{}
2976 inserts the comment line prefix from a neighboring line at the start
2977 of the new line. The default value of c-comment-prefix-regexp is
2978 @samp{//+\\|\\**}, which matches C++ style line comments like
2979
2980 @example
2981 // blah blah
2982 @end example
2983
2984 @noindent
2985 with two or more slashes in front of them, and the second and
2986 subsequent lines of C style block comments like
2987
2988 @example
2989 @group
2990 /*
2991 * blah blah
2992 */
2993 @end group
2994 @end example
2995
2996 @noindent
2997 with zero or more stars at the beginning of every line. If you change
2998 this variable, please make sure it still matches the comment starter
2999 (i.e., @code{//}) of line comments @emph{and} the line prefix inside
3000 block comments.
3001
3002 @findex c-setup-paragraph-variables
3003 @findex setup-paragraph-variables (c-)
3004 Also note that since @ccmode{} uses the value of
3005 @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp} to set up several other variables at
3006 mode initialization, there won't be any effect if you just change it
3007 inside a @ccmode{} buffer. You need to call the command
3008 @code{c-setup-paragraph-variables} too, to update those other
3009 variables. That's also the case if you modify
3010 @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp} in a mode hook, since @ccmode{} will
3011 already have set up these variables before calling the hook.
3012 @end defopt
3013
3014 In comments, @ccmode{} uses @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp} to adapt
3015 the line prefix from the other lines in the comment.
3016
3017 @vindex adaptive-fill-mode
3018 @cindex Adaptive Fill mode
3019 @ccmode{} uses adaptive fill mode (@pxref{Adaptive Fill,,, emacs, GNU
3020 Emacs Manual}) to make Emacs correctly keep the line prefix when
3021 filling paragraphs. That also makes Emacs preserve the text
3022 indentation @emph{inside} the comment line prefix. E.g., in the
3023 following comment, both paragraphs will be filled with the left
3024 margins of the texts kept intact:
3025
3026 @example
3027 @group
3028 /* Make a balanced b-tree of the nodes in the incoming
3029 * stream. But, to quote the famous words of Donald E.
3030 * Knuth,
3031 *
3032 * Beware of bugs in the above code; I have only
3033 * proved it correct, not tried it.
3034 */
3035 @end group
3036 @end example
3037
3038 @findex c-setup-filladapt
3039 @findex setup-filladapt (c-)
3040 @findex filladapt-mode
3041 @vindex filladapt-mode
3042 @cindex Filladapt mode
3043 It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages, notably Kyle
3044 E. Jones' Filladapt package@footnote{It's available from
3045 @uref{http://www.wonderworks.com/}. As of version 2.12, it does however
3046 lack a feature that makes it work suboptimally when
3047 @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp} matches the empty string (which it does
3048 by default). A patch for that is available from
3049 @uref{http://cc-mode.sourceforge.net/,, the CC Mode web site}.},
3050 @c 2005/11/22: The above is still believed to be the case.
3051 which handles things like bulleted lists nicely. There's a convenience
3052 function @code{c-setup-filladapt} that tunes the relevant variables in
3053 Filladapt for use in @ccmode{}. Call it from a mode hook, e.g., with
3054 something like this in your @file{.emacs}:
3055
3056 @example
3057 (defun my-c-mode-common-hook ()
3058 (c-setup-filladapt)
3059 (filladapt-mode 1))
3060 (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook 'my-c-mode-common-hook)
3061 @end example
3062
3063 @defopt c-block-comment-prefix
3064 @vindex block-comment-prefix (c-)
3065 @vindex c-comment-continuation-stars
3066 @vindex comment-continuation-stars (c-)
3067 Normally the comment line prefix inserted for a new line inside a
3068 comment is deduced from other lines in it. However there's one
3069 situation when there's no hint about what the prefix should look like,
3070 namely when a block comment is broken for the first time. This style
3071 variable@footnote{In versions before 5.26, this variable was called
3072 @code{c-comment-continuation-stars}. As a compatibility measure,
3073 @ccmode{} still uses the value on that variable if it's set.} is used
3074 then as the comment prefix. It defaults to @samp{*
3075 }@footnote{Actually, this default setting of
3076 @code{c-block-comment-prefix} typically gets overridden by the default
3077 style @code{gnu}, which sets it to blank. You can see the line
3078 splitting effect described here by setting a different style,
3079 e.g., @code{k&r} @xref{Choosing a Style}.}, which makes a comment
3080
3081 @example
3082 /* Got O(n^2) here, which is a Bad Thing. */
3083 @end example
3084
3085 @noindent
3086 break into
3087
3088 @example
3089 @group
3090 /* Got O(n^2) here, which
3091 * is a Bad Thing. */
3092 @end group
3093 @end example
3094
3095 Note that it won't work to adjust the indentation by putting leading
3096 spaces in @code{c-block-comment-prefix}, since @ccmode{} still uses the
3097 normal indentation engine to indent the line. Thus, the right way to
3098 fix the indentation is by customizing the @code{c} syntactic symbol. It
3099 defaults to @code{c-lineup-C-comments}, which handles the indentation of
3100 most common comment styles, see @ref{Line-Up Functions}.
3101 @end defopt
3102
3103 @defopt c-ignore-auto-fill
3104 @vindex ignore-auto-fill (c-)
3105 When auto fill mode is enabled, @ccmode{} can selectively ignore it
3106 depending on the context the line break would occur in, e.g., to never
3107 break a line automatically inside a string literal. This variable
3108 takes a list of symbols for the different contexts where auto-filling
3109 never should occur:
3110
3111 @table @code
3112 @item string
3113 Inside a string or character literal.
3114 @item c
3115 Inside a C style block comment.
3116 @item c++
3117 Inside a C++ style line comment.
3118 @item cpp
3119 Inside a preprocessor directive.
3120 @item code
3121 Anywhere else, i.e., in normal code.
3122 @end table
3123
3124 By default, @code{c-ignore-auto-fill} is set to @code{(string cpp
3125 code)}, which means that when auto-fill mode is activated,
3126 auto-filling only occurs in comments. In literals, it's often
3127 desirable to have explicit control over newlines. In preprocessor
3128 directives, the necessary @samp{\} escape character before the newline
3129 is not automatically inserted, so an automatic line break would
3130 produce invalid code. In normal code, line breaks are normally
3131 dictated by some logical structure in the code rather than the last
3132 whitespace character, so automatic line breaks there will produce poor
3133 results in the current implementation.
3134 @end defopt
3135
3136 @vindex comment-multi-line
3137 If inside a comment and @code{comment-multi-line} (@pxref{Auto
3138 Fill,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}} is non-@code{nil}, the
3139 indentation and
3140 line prefix are preserved. If inside a comment and
3141 @code{comment-multi-line} is @code{nil}, a new comment of the same
3142 type is started on the next line and indented as appropriate for
3143 comments.
3144
3145 Note that @ccmode{} sets @code{comment-multi-line} to @code{t} at
3146 startup. The reason is that @kbd{M-j} could otherwise produce sequences
3147 of single line block comments for texts that should logically be treated
3148 as one comment, and the rest of the paragraph handling code
3149 (e.g., @kbd{M-q} and @kbd{M-a}) can't cope with that, which would lead to
3150 inconsistent behavior.
3151
3152 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3153 @node Custom Auto-newlines, Clean-ups, Custom Filling and Breaking, Top
3154 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3155 @chapter Customizing Auto-newlines
3156 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3157
3158 @ccmode{} determines whether to insert auto-newlines in two basically
3159 different ways, depending on the character just typed:
3160
3161 @table @asis
3162 @item Braces and Colons
3163 @ccmode{} first determines the syntactic context of the brace or colon
3164 (@pxref{Syntactic Symbols}), then looks for a corresponding element in
3165 an alist. This element specifies where to put newlines: this is any
3166 combination of before and after the brace or colon. If no alist
3167 element is found, newlines are inserted both before and after a brace,
3168 but none are inserted around a colon. See @ref{Hanging Braces} and
3169 @ref{Hanging Colons}.
3170
3171 @item Semicolons and Commas
3172 The variable @code{c-hanging-semi&comma-criteria} contains a list of
3173 functions which determine whether to insert a newline after a newly
3174 typed semicolon or comma. @xref{Hanging Semicolons and Commas}.
3175 @end table
3176
3177 The names of these configuration variables contain @samp{hanging}
3178 because they let you @dfn{hang} the pertinent characters. A character
3179 which introduces a C construct is said to @dfn{hang on the right} when
3180 it appears at the end of a line after other code, being separated by a
3181 line break from the construct it introduces, like the opening brace in:
3182
3183 @example
3184 @group
3185 while (i < MAX) @{
3186 total += entry[i];
3187 entry [i++] = 0;
3188 @}
3189 @end group
3190 @end example
3191
3192 @noindent
3193 A character @dfn{hangs on the left} when it appears at the start of
3194 the line after the construct it closes off, like the above closing
3195 brace.
3196
3197 The next chapter, ``Clean-ups'', describes how to configure @ccmode{}
3198 to remove these automatically added newlines in certain specific
3199 circumstances. @xref{Clean-ups}.
3200
3201 @menu
3202 * Hanging Braces::
3203 * Hanging Colons::
3204 * Hanging Semicolons and Commas::
3205 @end menu
3206
3207
3208 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3209 @node Hanging Braces, Hanging Colons, Custom Auto-newlines, Custom Auto-newlines
3210 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3211 @section Hanging Braces
3212 @cindex hanging braces
3213 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3214
3215 To specify which kinds of braces you want auto-newlines put around,
3216 you set the style variable @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}. Its
3217 structure and semantics are described in this section. Details of how
3218 to set it up, and its relationship to CC Mode's style system are given
3219 in @ref{Style Variables}.
3220
3221 Say you wanted an auto-newline after (but not before) the following
3222 @samp{@{}:
3223
3224 @example
3225 if (foo < 17) @{
3226 @end example
3227
3228 @noindent
3229 First you need to find the @dfn{syntactic context} of the brace---type
3230 a @key{RET} before the brace to get it on a line of its
3231 own@footnote{Also insert a @samp{\} at the end of the previous line if
3232 you're in AWK Mode.}, then type @kbd{C-c C-s}. That will tell you
3233 something like:
3234
3235 @example
3236 ((substatement-open 1061))
3237 @end example
3238
3239 @noindent
3240 So here you need to put the entry @code{(substatement-open . (after))}
3241 into @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}.
3242
3243 If you don't want any auto-newlines for a particular syntactic symbol,
3244 put this into @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}:
3245
3246 @example
3247 (brace-entry-open)
3248 @end example
3249
3250 If some brace syntactic symbol is not in @code{c-hanging-brace-alist},
3251 its entry is taken by default as @code{(before after)}---insert a
3252 newline both before and after the brace. In place of a
3253 ``before/after'' list you can specify a function in this alist---this
3254 is useful when the auto newlines depend on the code around the brace.
3255
3256 @defopt c-hanging-braces-alist
3257 @vindex hanging-braces-alist (c-)
3258
3259 This variable is an association list which maps syntactic symbols to
3260 lists of places to insert a newline. @xref{Association
3261 Lists,,,@lispref{}, @lispreftitle{}}. The key of each element is the
3262 syntactic symbol, the associated value is either @code{nil}, a list,
3263 or a function.
3264
3265 @table @asis
3266 @item The Key: the syntactic symbol
3267 The syntactic symbols that are useful as keys in this list are
3268 @code{brace-list-intro}, @code{statement-cont},
3269 @code{inexpr-class-open}, @code{inexpr-class-close}, and all the
3270 @code{*-open} and @code{*-close} symbols. @xref{Syntactic Symbols},
3271 for a more detailed description of these syntactic symbols, except for
3272 @code{inexpr-class-open} and @code{inexpr-class-close}, which aren't
3273 actual syntactic symbols. Elements with any other value as a key get
3274 ignored.
3275
3276 The braces of anonymous inner classes in Java are given the special
3277 symbols @code{inexpr-class-open} and @code{inexpr-class-close}, so that
3278 they can be distinguished from the braces of normal classes@footnote{The
3279 braces of anonymous classes produce a combination of
3280 @code{inexpr-class}, and @code{class-open} or @code{class-close} in
3281 normal indentation analysis.}.
3282
3283 Note that the aggregate constructs in Pike mode, @samp{(@{}, @samp{@})},
3284 @samp{([}, @samp{])}, and @samp{(<}, @samp{>)}, do not count as brace
3285 lists in this regard, even though they do for normal indentation
3286 purposes. It's currently not possible to set automatic newlines on
3287 these constructs.
3288
3289 @item The associated value: the ``ACTION'' list or function
3290 The value associated with each syntactic symbol in this association
3291 list is called an @var{action}, which can be either a list or a
3292 function which returns a list. @xref{Custom Braces}, for how to use
3293 a function as a brace hanging @var{action}.
3294
3295 The list @var{action} (or the list returned by @var{action} when it's
3296 a function) contains some combination of the symbols @code{before} and
3297 @code{after}, directing @ccmode{} where to put newlines in
3298 relationship to the brace being inserted. Thus, if the list contains
3299 only the symbol @code{after}, then the brace hangs on the right side
3300 of the line, as in:
3301
3302 @example
3303 // here, open braces always 'hang'
3304 void spam( int i ) @{
3305 if( i == 7 ) @{
3306 dosomething(i);
3307 @}
3308 @}
3309 @end example
3310
3311 When the list contains both @code{after} and @code{before}, the braces
3312 will appear on a line by themselves, as shown by the close braces in
3313 the above example. The list can also be empty, in which case newlines
3314 are added neither before nor after the brace.
3315 @end table
3316
3317 If a syntactic symbol is missing entirely from
3318 @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}, it's treated in the same way as an
3319 @var{action} with a list containing @code{before} and @code{after}, so
3320 that braces by default end up on their own line.
3321
3322 For example, the default value of @code{c-hanging-braces-alist} is:
3323
3324 @example
3325 ((brace-list-open)
3326 (brace-entry-open)
3327 (statement-cont)
3328 (substatement-open after)
3329 (block-close . c-snug-do-while)
3330 (extern-lang-open after)
3331 (namespace-open after)
3332 (module-open after)
3333 (composition-open after)
3334 (inexpr-class-open after)
3335 (inexpr-class-close before))
3336 @end example
3337
3338 @noindent which says that @code{brace-list-open},
3339 @code{brace-entry-open} and @code{statement-cont}@footnote{Brace lists
3340 inside statements, such as initializers for static array variables
3341 inside functions in C, are recognized as @code{statement-cont}. All
3342 normal substatement blocks are recognized with other symbols.} braces
3343 should both hang on the right side and allow subsequent text to follow
3344 on the same line as the brace. Also, @code{substatement-open},
3345 @code{extern-lang-open}, and @code{inexpr-class-open} braces should hang
3346 on the right side, but subsequent text should follow on the next line.
3347 The opposite holds for @code{inexpr-class-close} braces; they won't
3348 hang, but the following text continues on the same line. Here, in the
3349 @code{block-close} entry, you also see an example of using a function as
3350 an @var{action}. In all other cases, braces are put on a line by
3351 themselves.
3352 @end defopt
3353
3354 @menu
3355 * Custom Braces::
3356 @end menu
3357
3358 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3359 @node Custom Braces, , Hanging Braces, Hanging Braces
3360 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3361 @subsection Custom Brace Hanging
3362 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3363
3364 @vindex c-hanging-braces-alist
3365 @vindex hanging-braces-alist (c-)
3366 @cindex action functions
3367 Syntactic symbols aren't the only place where you can customize
3368 @ccmode{} with the lisp equivalent of callback functions. Remember
3369 that @var{action}s are usually a list containing some combination of
3370 the symbols @code{before} and @code{after} (@pxref{Hanging Braces}).
3371 For more flexibility, you can instead specify brace ``hanginess'' by
3372 giving a syntactic symbol an @dfn{action function} in
3373 @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}; this function determines the
3374 ``hanginess'' of a brace, usually by looking at the code near it.
3375
3376 @cindex customization, brace hanging
3377 An action function is called with two arguments: the syntactic symbol
3378 for the brace (e.g., @code{substatement-open}), and the buffer position
3379 where the brace has been inserted. Point is undefined on entry to an
3380 action function, but the function must preserve it (e.g., by using
3381 @code{save-excursion}). The return value should be a list containing
3382 some combination of @code{before} and @code{after}, including neither
3383 of them (i.e., @code{nil}).
3384
3385 @defvar c-syntactic-context
3386 @vindex syntactic-context (c-)
3387 During the call to the indentation or brace hanging @var{action}
3388 function, this variable is bound to the full syntactic analysis list.
3389 This might be, for example, @samp{((block-close 73))}. Don't ever
3390 give @code{c-syntactic-context} a value yourself---this would disrupt
3391 the proper functioning of @ccmode{}.
3392
3393 This variable is also bound in three other circumstances:
3394 (i)@w{ }when calling a c-hanging-semi&comma-criteria function
3395 (@pxref{Hanging Semicolons and Commas}); (ii)@w{ }when calling a
3396 line-up function (@pxref{Custom Line-Up}); (iii)@w{ }when calling a
3397 c-special-indent-hook function (@pxref{Other Indentation}).
3398 @end defvar
3399
3400 As an example, @ccmode{} itself uses this feature to dynamically
3401 determine the hanginess of braces which close ``do-while''
3402 constructs:
3403
3404 @example
3405 void do_list( int count, char** atleast_one_string )
3406 @{
3407 int i=0;
3408 do @{
3409 handle_string( atleast_one_string[i] );
3410 i++;
3411 @} while( i < count );
3412 @}
3413 @end example
3414
3415 @ccmode{} assigns the @code{block-close} syntactic symbol to the
3416 brace that closes the @code{do} construct, and normally we'd like the
3417 line that follows a @code{block-close} brace to begin on a separate
3418 line. However, with ``do-while'' constructs, we want the
3419 @code{while} clause to follow the closing brace. To do this, we
3420 associate the @code{block-close} symbol with the @var{action} function
3421 @code{c-snug-do-while}:
3422
3423 @example
3424 (defun c-snug-do-while (syntax pos)
3425 "Dynamically calculate brace hanginess for do-while statements."
3426 (save-excursion
3427 (let (langelem)
3428 (if (and (eq syntax 'block-close)
3429 (setq langelem (assq 'block-close c-syntactic-context))
3430 (progn (goto-char (cdr langelem))
3431 (if (= (following-char) ?@{)
3432 (forward-sexp -1))
3433 (looking-at "\\<do\\>[^_]")))
3434 '(before)
3435 '(before after)))))
3436 @end example
3437
3438 @findex c-snug-do-while
3439 @findex snug-do-while (c-)
3440 This function simply looks to see if the brace closes a ``do-while''
3441 clause and if so, returns the list @samp{(before)} indicating
3442 that a newline should be inserted before the brace, but not after it.
3443 In all other cases, it returns the list @samp{(before after)} so
3444 that the brace appears on a line by itself.
3445
3446 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3447 @node Hanging Colons, Hanging Semicolons and Commas, Hanging Braces, Custom Auto-newlines
3448 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3449 @section Hanging Colons
3450 @cindex hanging colons
3451 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3452
3453 @cindex customization, colon hanging
3454 @vindex c-hanging-colons-alist
3455 @vindex hanging-colons-alist (c-)
3456
3457 Using a mechanism similar to brace hanging (@pxref{Hanging Braces}),
3458 colons can also be made to hang using the style variable
3459 @code{c-hanging-colons-alist}: when a colon is typed, @ccmode
3460 determines its syntactic context, looks this up in the alist
3461 @code{c-changing-colons-alist} and inserts up to two newlines
3462 accordingly. Here, however, If @ccmode fails to find an entry for a
3463 syntactic symbol in the alist, no newlines are inserted around the
3464 newly typed colon.
3465
3466 @defopt c-hanging-colons-alist
3467 @vindex hanging-colons-alist (c-)
3468
3469 @table @asis
3470 @item The Key: the syntactic symbol
3471 The syntactic symbols appropriate as keys in this association list
3472 are: @code{case-label}, @code{label}, @code{access-label},
3473 @code{member-init-intro}, and @code{inher-intro}. @xref{Syntactic
3474 Symbols}. Elements with any other value as a key get ignored.
3475
3476 @item The associated value: the ``ACTION'' list
3477 The @var{action} here is simply a list containing a combination of the
3478 symbols @code{before} and @code{after}. Unlike in
3479 @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}, functions as @var{actions} are not
3480 supported; there doesn't seem to be any need for them.
3481 @end table
3482 @end defopt
3483
3484 In C++, double-colons are used as a scope operator but because these
3485 colons always appear right next to each other, newlines before and after
3486 them are controlled by a different mechanism, called @dfn{clean-ups} in
3487 @ccmode{}. @xref{Clean-ups}, for details.
3488
3489 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3490 @node Hanging Semicolons and Commas, , Hanging Colons, Custom Auto-newlines
3491 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3492 @section Hanging Semicolons and Commas
3493 @cindex hanging semicolons
3494 @cindex hanging commas
3495 @cindex customization, semicolon newlines
3496 @cindex customization, comma newlines
3497 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3498
3499 @defopt c-hanging-semi&comma-criteria
3500 @vindex hanging-semi&comma-criteria (c-)
3501 This style variable takes a list of functions; these get called when
3502 you type a semicolon or comma. The functions are called in order
3503 without arguments. When these functions are entered, point is just
3504 after the newly inserted @samp{;} or @samp{,} and they must preserve
3505 point (e.g., by using @code{save-excursion}). During the call, the
3506 variable @code{c-syntactic-context} is bound to the syntactic context
3507 of the current line@footnote{This was first introduced in @ccmode{}
3508 5.31.} @pxref{Custom Braces}. These functions don't insert newlines
3509 themselves, rather they direct @ccmode{} whether or not to do so.
3510 They should return one of the following values:
3511
3512 @table @code
3513 @item t
3514 A newline is to be inserted after the @samp{;} or @samp{,}, and no
3515 more functions from the list are to be called.
3516 @item stop
3517 No more functions from the list are to be called, and no newline is to
3518 be inserted.
3519 @item nil
3520 No determination has been made, and the next function in the list is
3521 to be called.
3522 @end table
3523
3524 Note that auto-newlines are never inserted @emph{before} a semicolon
3525 or comma. If every function in the list is called without a
3526 determination being made, then no newline is added.
3527
3528 In AWK mode, this variable is set by default to @code{nil}. In the
3529 other modes, the default value is a list containing a single function,
3530 @code{c-semi&comma-inside-parenlist}. This inserts newlines after all
3531 semicolons, apart from those separating @code{for}-clause statements.
3532 @end defopt
3533
3534 @defun c-semi&comma-no-newlines-before-nonblanks
3535 @findex semi&comma-no-newlines-before-nonblanks (c-)
3536 This is an example of a criteria function, provided by @ccmode{}. It
3537 prevents newlines from being inserted after semicolons when there is a
3538 non-blank following line. Otherwise, it makes no determination. To
3539 use, add this function to the front of the
3540 @code{c-hanging-semi&comma-criteria} list.
3541
3542 @example
3543 (defun c-semi&comma-no-newlines-before-nonblanks ()
3544 (save-excursion
3545 (if (and (eq last-command-char ?\;)
3546 (zerop (forward-line 1))
3547 (not (looking-at "^[ \t]*$")))
3548 'stop
3549 nil)))
3550 @end example
3551 @end defun
3552
3553 @defun c-semi&comma-inside-parenlist
3554 @findex semi&comma-inside-parenlist (c-)
3555 @defunx c-semi&comma-no-newlines-for-oneline-inliners
3556 @findex semi&comma-no-newlines-for-oneline-inliners (c-)
3557 The function @code{c-semi&comma-inside-parenlist} is what prevents
3558 newlines from being inserted inside the parenthesis list of @code{for}
3559 statements. In addition to
3560 @code{c-semi&comma-no-newlines-before-nonblanks} described above,
3561 @ccmode{} also comes with the criteria function
3562 @code{c-semi&comma-no-newlines-for-oneline-inliners}, which suppresses
3563 newlines after semicolons inside one-line inline method definitions
3564 (e.g., in C++ or Java).
3565 @end defun
3566
3567
3568 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3569 @node Clean-ups, Indentation Engine Basics, Custom Auto-newlines, Top
3570 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3571 @chapter Clean-ups
3572 @cindex clean-ups
3573 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3574
3575 @dfn{Clean-ups} are mechanisms which remove (or exceptionally, add)
3576 whitespace in specific circumstances and are complementary to colon
3577 and brace hanging. You enable a clean-up by adding its symbol into
3578 @code{c-cleanup-list}, e.g., like this:
3579
3580 @example
3581 (add-to-list 'c-cleanup-list 'space-before-funcall)
3582 @end example
3583
3584 On the surface, it would seem that clean-ups overlap the functionality
3585 provided by the @code{c-hanging-*-alist} variables. Clean-ups,
3586 however, are used to adjust code ``after-the-fact'', i.e., to adjust
3587 the whitespace in constructs later than when they were typed.
3588
3589 Most of the clean-ups remove automatically inserted newlines, and are
3590 only active when auto-newline minor mode is turned on. Others will
3591 work all the time. Note that clean-ups are only performed when there
3592 is nothing but whitespace appearing between the individual components
3593 of the construct, and (apart from @code{comment-close-slash}) when the
3594 construct does not occur within a literal (@pxref{Auto-newlines}).
3595
3596 @defopt c-cleanup-list
3597 @vindex cleanup-list (c-)
3598 @cindex literal
3599
3600 You configure @ccmode{}'s clean-ups by setting the style variable
3601 @code{c-cleanup-list}, which is a list of clean-up symbols. By
3602 default, @ccmode{} cleans up only the @code{scope-operator} construct,
3603 which is necessary for proper C++ support.
3604 @end defopt
3605
3606 These are the clean-ups that are only active when electric and
3607 auto-newline minor modes are enabled:
3608
3609 @c TBD: Would like to use some sort of @deffoo here; @table indents a
3610 @c bit too much in dvi output.
3611 @table @code
3612 @item brace-else-brace
3613 Clean up @samp{@} else @{} constructs by placing the entire construct on
3614 a single line. Clean up occurs when the open brace after the
3615 @samp{else} is typed. So for example, this:
3616
3617 @example
3618 @group
3619 void spam(int i)
3620 @{
3621 if( i==7 ) @{
3622 dosomething();
3623 @}
3624 else
3625 @{
3626 @end group
3627 @end example
3628
3629 @noindent
3630 appears like this after the last open brace is typed:
3631
3632 @example
3633 @group
3634 void spam(int i)
3635 @{
3636 if( i==7 ) @{
3637 dosomething();
3638 @} else @{
3639 @end group
3640 @end example
3641
3642 @item brace-elseif-brace
3643 Similar to the @code{brace-else-brace} clean-up, but this cleans up
3644 @samp{@} else if (...) @{} constructs. For example:
3645
3646 @example
3647 @group
3648 void spam(int i)
3649 @{
3650 if( i==7 ) @{
3651 dosomething();
3652 @}
3653 else if( i==3 )
3654 @{
3655 @end group
3656 @end example
3657
3658 @noindent
3659 appears like this after the last open parenthesis is typed:
3660
3661 @example
3662 @group
3663 void spam(int i)
3664 @{
3665 if( i==7 ) @{
3666 dosomething();
3667 @} else if(
3668 @end group
3669 @end example
3670
3671 @noindent
3672 and like this after the last open brace is typed:
3673
3674 @example
3675 @group
3676 void spam(int i)
3677 @{
3678 if( i==7 ) @{
3679 dosomething();
3680 @} else if( i==3 ) @{
3681 @end group
3682 @end example
3683
3684 @item brace-catch-brace
3685 Analogous to @code{brace-elseif-brace}, but cleans up @samp{@} catch
3686 (...) @{} in C++ and Java mode.
3687
3688 @item empty-defun-braces
3689 Clean up braces following a top-level function or class definition that
3690 contains no body. Clean up occurs when the closing brace is typed.
3691 Thus the following:
3692
3693 @example
3694 @group
3695 class Spam
3696 @{
3697 @}
3698 @end group
3699 @end example
3700
3701 @noindent
3702 is transformed into this when the close brace is typed:
3703
3704 @example
3705 @group
3706 class Spam
3707 @{@}
3708 @end group
3709 @end example
3710
3711 @item defun-close-semi
3712 Clean up the terminating semicolon on top-level function or class
3713 definitions when they follow a close brace. Clean up occurs when the
3714 semicolon is typed. So for example, the following:
3715
3716 @example
3717 @group
3718 class Spam
3719 @{
3720 ...
3721 @}
3722 ;
3723 @end group
3724 @end example
3725
3726 @noindent
3727 is transformed into this when the semicolon is typed:
3728
3729 @example
3730 @group
3731 class Spam
3732 @{
3733 ...
3734 @};
3735 @end group
3736 @end example
3737
3738 @item list-close-comma
3739 Clean up commas following braces in array and aggregate initializers.
3740 Clean up occurs when the comma is typed. The space before the comma
3741 is zapped just like the space before the semicolon in
3742 @code{defun-close-semi}.
3743
3744 @item scope-operator
3745 Clean up double colons which might designate a C++ scope operator split
3746 across multiple lines@footnote{Certain C++ constructs introduce
3747 ambiguous situations, so @code{scope-operator} clean-ups might not
3748 always be correct. This usually only occurs when scoped identifiers
3749 appear in switch label tags.}. Clean up occurs when the second colon is
3750 typed. You will always want @code{scope-operator} in the
3751 @code{c-cleanup-list} when you are editing C++ code.
3752
3753 @item one-liner-defun
3754 Clean up a single line of code enclosed by defun braces by removing
3755 the whitespace before and after the code. The clean-up happens when
3756 the closing brace is typed. If the variable
3757 @code{c-max-one-liner-length} is set, the cleanup is only done if the
3758 resulting line would be no longer than the value of that variable.
3759
3760 For example, consider this AWK code:
3761
3762 @example
3763 @group
3764 BEGIN @{
3765 FS = "\t" # use <TAB> as a field separator
3766 @}
3767 @end group
3768 @end example
3769
3770 @noindent
3771 It gets compacted to the following when the closing brace is typed:
3772
3773 @example
3774 @group
3775 BEGIN @{FS = "\t"@} # use <TAB> as a field separator
3776 @end group
3777 @end example
3778
3779 @defopt c-max-one-liner-length
3780 @vindex max-one-liner-length (c-)
3781 The maximum length of the resulting line for which the clean-up
3782 @code{one-liner-defun} will be triggered. This length is that of the entire
3783 line, including any leading whitespace and any trailing comment. Its
3784 default value is 80. If the value is zero or @code{nil}, no limit
3785 applies.
3786 @end defopt
3787 @end table
3788
3789 The following clean-ups are always active when they occur on
3790 @code{c-cleanup-list}, regardless of whether Electric minor mode or
3791 Auto-newline minor mode are enabled:
3792
3793 @table @code
3794 @item space-before-funcall
3795 Insert a space between the function name and the opening parenthesis
3796 of a function call. This produces function calls in the style
3797 mandated by the GNU coding standards, e.g., @samp{signal@w{ }(SIGINT,
3798 SIG_IGN)} and @samp{abort@w{ }()}. Clean up occurs when the opening
3799 parenthesis is typed. This clean-up should never be active in AWK
3800 Mode, since such a space is syntactically invalid for user defined
3801 functions.
3802
3803 @item compact-empty-funcall
3804 Clean up any space between the function name and the opening parenthesis
3805 of a function call that has no arguments. This is typically used
3806 together with @code{space-before-funcall} if you prefer the GNU function
3807 call style for functions with arguments but think it looks ugly when
3808 it's only an empty parenthesis pair. I.e., you will get @samp{signal
3809 (SIGINT, SIG_IGN)}, but @samp{abort()}. Clean up occurs when the
3810 closing parenthesis is typed.
3811
3812 @item comment-close-slash
3813 When inside a block comment, terminate the comment when you type a slash
3814 at the beginning of a line (i.e., immediately after the comment prefix).
3815 This clean-up removes whitespace preceding the slash and if needed,
3816 inserts a star to complete the token @samp{*/}. Type @kbd{C-q /} in this
3817 situation if you just want a literal @samp{/} inserted.
3818 @end table
3819
3820
3821 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3822 @node Indentation Engine Basics, Customizing Indentation, Clean-ups, Top
3823 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3824 @chapter Indentation Engine Basics
3825 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3826
3827 This chapter will briefly cover how @ccmode{} indents lines of code.
3828 It is helpful to understand the indentation model being used so that
3829 you will know how to customize @ccmode{} for your personal coding
3830 style. All the details are in @ref{Customizing Indentation}.
3831
3832 @ccmode{} has an indentation engine that provides a flexible and
3833 general mechanism for customizing indentation. When @ccmode{} indents
3834 a line of code, it separates its calculations into two steps:
3835
3836 @enumerate
3837 @item
3838 @cindex syntactic symbol
3839 @cindex anchor position
3840 It analyzes the line to determine its @dfn{syntactic symbol(s)} (the
3841 kind of language construct it's looking at) and its @dfn{anchor
3842 position} (the position earlier in the file that @ccmode{} will indent
3843 the line relative to). The anchor position might be the location of
3844 an opening brace in the previous line, for example. @xref{Syntactic
3845 Analysis}.
3846 @item
3847 @cindex offsets
3848 @cindex indentation offset specifications
3849 It looks up the syntactic symbol(s) in the configuration to get the
3850 corresponding @dfn{offset(s)}. The symbol @code{+}, which means
3851 ``indent this line one more level'' is a typical offset. @ccmode{}
3852 then applies these offset(s) to the anchor position, giving the
3853 indentation for the line. The different sorts of offsets are
3854 described in @ref{c-offsets-alist}.
3855 @end enumerate
3856
3857 In exceptional circumstances, the syntax directed indentation
3858 described here may be a nuisance rather than a help. You can disable
3859 it by setting @code{c-syntactic-indentation} to @code{nil}. (To set
3860 the variable interactively, @ref{Minor Modes}).
3861
3862 @defopt c-syntactic-indentation
3863 @vindex syntactic-indentation (c-)
3864 When this is non-@code{nil} (which it is by default), the indentation
3865 of code is done according to its syntactic structure. When it's
3866 @code{nil}, every line is just indented to the same level as the
3867 previous one, and @kbd{TAB} (@code{c-indent-command}) adjusts the
3868 indentation in steps of @code{c-basic-offset}. The current style
3869 (@pxref{Config Basics}) then has no effect on indentation, nor do any
3870 of the variables associated with indentation, not even
3871 @code{c-special-indent-hook}.
3872 @end defopt
3873
3874 @menu
3875 * Syntactic Analysis::
3876 * Syntactic Symbols::
3877 * Indentation Calculation::
3878 @end menu
3879
3880
3881 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3882 @node Syntactic Analysis, Syntactic Symbols, Indentation Engine Basics, Indentation Engine Basics
3883 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3884 @section Syntactic Analysis
3885 @cindex syntactic analysis
3886 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3887
3888 @cindex syntactic element
3889 @cindex syntactic context
3890 The first thing @ccmode{} does when indenting a line of code, is to
3891 analyze the line by calling @code{c-guess-basic-syntax}, determining
3892 the syntactic context of the (first) construct on that line. Although
3893 this function is mainly used internally, it can sometimes be useful in
3894 Line-up functions (@pxref{Custom Line-Up}) or in functions on
3895 @code{c-special-indent-hook} (@pxref{Other Indentation}).
3896
3897 @defun c-guess-basic-syntax
3898 @findex guess-basic-syntax (c-)
3899 Determine the syntactic context of the current line.
3900 @end defun
3901
3902 The @dfn{syntactic context} is a list of @dfn{syntactic elements},
3903 where each syntactic element in turn is a list@footnote{In
3904 @ccmode 5.28 and earlier, a syntactic element was a dotted pair; the
3905 cons was the syntactic symbol and the cdr was the anchor position.
3906 For compatibility's sake, the parameter passed to a line-up function
3907 still has this dotted pair form (@pxref{Custom Line-Up}).} Here is a
3908 brief and typical example:
3909
3910 @example
3911 ((defun-block-intro 1959))
3912 @end example
3913
3914 @cindex syntactic symbol
3915 @noindent
3916 The first thing inside each syntactic element is always a
3917 @dfn{syntactic symbol}. It describes the kind of construct that was
3918 recognized, e.g., @code{statement}, @code{substatement},
3919 @code{class-open}, @code{class-close}, etc. @xref{Syntactic Symbols},
3920 for a complete list of currently recognized syntactic symbols and
3921 their semantics. The remaining entries are various data associated
3922 with the recognized construct; there might be zero or more.
3923
3924 @cindex anchor position
3925 Conceptually, a line of code is always indented relative to some
3926 position higher up in the buffer (typically the indentation of the
3927 previous line). That position is the @dfn{anchor position} in the
3928 syntactic element. If there is an entry after the syntactic symbol in
3929 the syntactic element list then it's either @code{nil} or that anchor position.
3930
3931 Here is an example. Suppose we had the following code as the only thing
3932 in a C++ buffer @footnote{The line numbers in this and future examples
3933 don't actually appear in the buffer, of course!}:
3934
3935 @example
3936 1: void swap( int& a, int& b )
3937 2: @{
3938 3: int tmp = a;
3939 4: a = b;
3940 5: b = tmp;
3941 6: @}
3942 @end example
3943
3944 @noindent
3945 We can use @kbd{C-c C-s} (@code{c-show-syntactic-information}) to
3946 report what the syntactic analysis is for the current line:
3947
3948 @table @asis
3949 @item @kbd{C-c C-s} (@code{c-show-syntactic-information})
3950 @kindex C-c C-s
3951 @findex c-show-syntactic-information
3952 @findex show-syntactic-information (c-)
3953 This command calculates the syntactic analysis of the current line and
3954 displays it in the minibuffer. The command also highlights the anchor
3955 position(s).
3956 @end table
3957
3958 Running this command on line 4 of this example, we'd see in the echo
3959 area@footnote{With a universal argument (i.e., @kbd{C-u C-c C-s}) the
3960 analysis is inserted into the buffer as a comment on the current
3961 line.}:
3962
3963 @example
3964 ((statement 35))
3965 @end example
3966
3967 @noindent
3968 and the @samp{i} of @code{int} on line 3 would be highlighted. This
3969 tells us that the line is a statement and it is indented relative to
3970 buffer position 35, the highlighted position. If you were to move
3971 point to line 3 and hit @kbd{C-c C-s}, you would see:
3972
3973 @example
3974 ((defun-block-intro 29))
3975 @end example
3976
3977 @noindent
3978 This indicates that the @samp{int} line is the first statement in a top
3979 level function block, and is indented relative to buffer position 29,
3980 which is the brace just after the function header.
3981
3982 Here's another example:
3983
3984 @example
3985 1: int add( int val, int incr, int doit )
3986 2: @{
3987 3: if( doit )
3988 4: @{
3989 5: return( val + incr );
3990 6: @}
3991 7: return( val );
3992 8: @}
3993 @end example
3994
3995 @noindent
3996 Hitting @kbd{C-c C-s} on line 4 gives us:
3997
3998 @example
3999 ((substatement-open 46))
4000 @end example
4001
4002 @cindex substatement
4003 @cindex substatement block
4004 @noindent
4005 which tells us that this is a brace that @emph{opens} a substatement
4006 block.@footnote{A @dfn{substatement} is the line after a
4007 conditional statement, such as @code{if}, @code{else}, @code{while},
4008 @code{do}, @code{switch}, etc. A @dfn{substatement
4009 block} is a brace block following one of these conditional statements.}
4010
4011 @cindex comment-only line
4012 Syntactic contexts can contain more than one element, and syntactic
4013 elements need not have anchor positions. The most common example of
4014 this is a @dfn{comment-only line}:
4015
4016 @example
4017 1: void draw_list( List<Drawables>& drawables )
4018 2: @{
4019 3: // call the virtual draw() method on each element in list
4020 4: for( int i=0; i < drawables.count(), ++i )
4021 5: @{
4022 6: drawables[i].draw();
4023 7: @}
4024 8: @}
4025 @end example
4026
4027 @noindent
4028 Hitting @kbd{C-c C-s} on line 3 of this example gives:
4029
4030 @example
4031 ((comment-intro) (defun-block-intro 46))
4032 @end example
4033
4034 @noindent
4035 and you can see that the syntactic context contains two syntactic
4036 elements. Notice that the first element, @samp{(comment-intro)}, has no
4037 anchor position.
4038
4039
4040 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4041 @node Syntactic Symbols, Indentation Calculation, Syntactic Analysis, Indentation Engine Basics
4042 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4043 @section Syntactic Symbols
4044 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4045
4046 @cindex syntactic symbols, brief list
4047 @vindex c-offsets-alist
4048 @vindex offsets-alist (c-)
4049 This section is a complete list of the syntactic symbols which appear
4050 in the @code{c-offsets-alist} style variable, along with brief
4051 descriptions. The previous section (@pxref{Syntactic Analysis})
4052 states what syntactic symbols are and how the indentation engine uses
4053 them.
4054
4055 More detailed descriptions of these symbols, together with snippets of
4056 source code to which they apply, appear in the examples in the
4057 subsections below. Note that, in the interests of brevity, the anchor
4058 position associated with most syntactic symbols is @emph{not}
4059 specified. In cases of doubt, type @kbd{C-c C-s} on a pertinent
4060 line---this highlights the anchor position.
4061
4062 @ssindex -open symbols
4063 @ssindex -close symbols
4064 @ssindex -block-intro symbols
4065 The syntactic symbols which indicate brace constructs follow a general
4066 naming convention. When a line begins with an open or close brace,
4067 its syntactic symbol will contain the suffix @code{-open} or
4068 @code{-close} respectively. The first line within the brace block
4069 construct will contain the suffix @code{-block-intro}.
4070
4071 @ssindex -intro symbols
4072 @ssindex -cont symbols
4073 In constructs which can span several lines, a distinction is usually
4074 made between the first line that introduces the construct and the
4075 lines that continue it. The syntactic symbols that indicate these
4076 lines will contain the suffixes @code{-intro} or @code{-cont}
4077 respectively.
4078
4079 The best way to understand how all this works is by looking at some
4080 examples. Remember that you can see the syntax of any source code
4081 line by using @kbd{C-c C-s}.
4082
4083 @table @code
4084 @item string
4085 Inside a multiline string. @ref{Literal Symbols}.
4086 @item c
4087 Inside a multiline C style block comment. @ref{Literal Symbols}.
4088 @item defun-open
4089 Brace that opens a top-level function definition. @ref{Function
4090 Symbols}.
4091 @item defun-close
4092 Brace that closes a top-level function definition. @ref{Function
4093 Symbols}.
4094 @item defun-block-intro
4095 The first line in a top-level defun. @ref{Function Symbols}.
4096 @item class-open
4097 Brace that opens a class definition. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4098 @item class-close
4099 Brace that closes a class definition. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4100 @item inline-open
4101 Brace that opens an in-class inline method. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4102 @item inline-close
4103 Brace that closes an in-class inline method. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4104 @item func-decl-cont
4105 The region between a function definition's argument list and the
4106 function opening brace (excluding K&R argument declarations). In C,
4107 you cannot put anything but whitespace and comments in this region,
4108 however in C++ and Java, @code{throws} declarations and other things
4109 can appear here. @ref{Literal Symbols}. @c @emph{FIXME!!! Can it not
4110 @c go somewhere better?}
4111 @item knr-argdecl-intro
4112 First line of a K&R C argument declaration. @ref{K&R Symbols}.
4113 @item knr-argdecl
4114 Subsequent lines in a K&R C argument declaration. @ref{K&R Symbols}.
4115 @item topmost-intro
4116 The first line in a ``topmost'' definition. @ref{Function Symbols}.
4117 @item topmost-intro-cont
4118 Topmost definition continuation lines. This is only used in the parts
4119 that aren't covered by other symbols such as @code{func-decl-cont} and
4120 @code{knr-argdecl}. @ref{Function Symbols}.
4121 @item annotation-top-cont
4122 Topmost definition continuation lines where all previous items are
4123 annotations. @ref{Java Symbols}.
4124 @item member-init-intro
4125 First line in a member initialization list. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4126 @item member-init-cont
4127 Subsequent member initialization list lines. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4128 @item inher-intro
4129 First line of a multiple inheritance list. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4130 @item inher-cont
4131 Subsequent multiple inheritance lines. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4132 @item block-open
4133 Statement block open brace. @ref{Literal Symbols}.
4134 @item block-close
4135 Statement block close brace. @ref{Conditional Construct Symbols}.
4136 @item brace-list-open
4137 Open brace of an enum or static array list. @ref{Brace List Symbols}.
4138 @item brace-list-close
4139 Close brace of an enum or static array list. @ref{Brace List Symbols}.
4140 @item brace-list-intro
4141 First line in an enum or static array list. @ref{Brace List Symbols}.
4142 @item brace-list-entry
4143 Subsequent lines in an enum or static array list. @ref{Brace List
4144 Symbols}.
4145 @item brace-entry-open
4146 Subsequent lines in an enum or static array list where the line begins
4147 with an open brace. @ref{Brace List Symbols}.
4148 @item statement
4149 A statement. @ref{Function Symbols}.
4150 @item statement-cont
4151 A continuation of a statement. @ref{Function Symbols}.
4152 @item annotation-var-cont
4153 A continuation of a statement where all previous items are
4154 annotations. @ref{Java Symbols}.
4155 @item statement-block-intro
4156 The first line in a new statement block. @ref{Conditional Construct
4157 Symbols}.
4158 @item statement-case-intro
4159 The first line in a case block. @ref{Switch Statement Symbols}.
4160 @item statement-case-open
4161 The first line in a case block that starts with a brace. @ref{Switch
4162 Statement Symbols}.
4163 @item substatement
4164 The first line after a conditional or loop construct.
4165 @ref{Conditional Construct Symbols}.
4166 @item substatement-open
4167 The brace that opens a substatement block. @ref{Conditional Construct
4168 Symbols}.
4169 @item substatement-label
4170 The first line after a conditional or loop construct if it's a label.
4171 @ref{Conditional Construct Symbols}.
4172 @item case-label
4173 A label in a @code{switch} block. @ref{Switch Statement Symbols}.
4174 @item access-label
4175 C++ access control label. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4176 @item label
4177 Any other label. @ref{Literal Symbols}.
4178 @item do-while-closure
4179 The @code{while} line that ends a @code{do}-@code{while} construct.
4180 @ref{Conditional Construct Symbols}.
4181 @item else-clause
4182 The @code{else} line of an @code{if}-@code{else} construct.
4183 @ref{Conditional Construct Symbols}.
4184 @item catch-clause
4185 The @code{catch} or @code{finally} (in Java) line of a
4186 @code{try}-@code{catch} construct. @ref{Conditional Construct
4187 Symbols}.
4188 @item comment-intro
4189 A line containing only a comment introduction. @ref{Literal Symbols}.
4190 @item arglist-intro
4191 The first line in an argument list. @ref{Paren List Symbols}.
4192 @item arglist-cont
4193 Subsequent argument list lines when no arguments follow on the same
4194 line as the arglist opening paren. @ref{Paren List Symbols}.
4195 @item arglist-cont-nonempty
4196 Subsequent argument list lines when at least one argument follows on
4197 the same line as the arglist opening paren. @ref{Paren List Symbols}.
4198 @item arglist-close
4199 The solo close paren of an argument list. @ref{Paren List Symbols}.
4200 @item stream-op
4201 Lines continuing a stream operator (C++ only). @ref{Literal
4202 Symbols}. @c @emph{FIXME!!! Can this not be moved somewhere better?}
4203 @item inclass
4204 The line is nested inside a class definition. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4205 @item cpp-macro
4206 The start of a preprocessor macro definition. @ref{Literal Symbols}.
4207 @item cpp-define-intro
4208 The first line inside a multiline preprocessor macro if
4209 @code{c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros} is set. @ref{Multiline Macro
4210 Symbols}.
4211 @item cpp-macro-cont
4212 All lines inside multiline preprocessor macros if
4213 @code{c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros} is @code{nil}.
4214 @ref{Multiline Macro Symbols}.
4215 @item friend
4216 A C++ friend declaration. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4217 @item objc-method-intro
4218 The first line of an Objective-C method definition. @ref{Objective-C
4219 Method Symbols}.
4220 @item objc-method-args-cont
4221 Lines continuing an Objective-C method definition. @ref{Objective-C
4222 Method Symbols}.
4223 @item objc-method-call-cont
4224 Lines continuing an Objective-C method call. @ref{Objective-C Method
4225 Symbols}.
4226 @item extern-lang-open
4227 Brace that opens an @code{extern} block (e.g., @code{extern "C"
4228 @{...@}}). @ref{External Scope Symbols}.
4229 @item extern-lang-close
4230 Brace that closes an @code{extern} block. @ref{External Scope
4231 Symbols}.
4232 @item inextern-lang
4233 Analogous to @code{inclass} syntactic symbol, but used inside
4234 @code{extern} blocks. @ref{External Scope Symbols}.
4235 @item namespace-open
4236 @itemx namespace-close
4237 @itemx innamespace
4238 These are analogous to the three @code{extern-lang} symbols above, but
4239 are returned for C++ namespace blocks. @ref{External Scope Symbols}.
4240 @item module-open
4241 @itemx module-close
4242 @itemx inmodule
4243 Analogous to the above, but for CORBA IDL @code{module} blocks.
4244 @ref{External Scope Symbols}.
4245 @item composition-open
4246 @itemx composition-close
4247 @itemx incomposition
4248 Analogous to the above, but for CORBA CIDL @code{composition} blocks.
4249 @ref{External Scope Symbols}.
4250 @item template-args-cont
4251 C++ template argument list continuations. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4252 @item inlambda
4253 Analogous to @code{inclass} syntactic symbol, but used inside lambda
4254 (i.e., anonymous) functions. Only used in Pike mode. @ref{Statement
4255 Block Symbols}.
4256 @item lambda-intro-cont
4257 Lines continuing the header of a lambda function, i.e., between the
4258 @code{lambda} keyword and the function body. Only used in Pike mode.
4259 @ref{Statement Block Symbols}.
4260 @item inexpr-statement
4261 A statement block inside an expression. The gcc C and C++ extension
4262 for this is recognized. It's also used for the special functions that
4263 take a statement block as an argument in Pike. @ref{Statement Block
4264 Symbols}.
4265 @item inexpr-class
4266 A class definition inside an expression. This is used for anonymous
4267 classes in Java. It's also used for anonymous array initializers in
4268 Java. @ref{Java Symbols}.
4269 @end table
4270
4271 @menu
4272 * Function Symbols::
4273 * Class Symbols::
4274 * Conditional Construct Symbols::
4275 * Switch Statement Symbols::
4276 * Brace List Symbols::
4277 * External Scope Symbols::
4278 * Paren List Symbols::
4279 * Literal Symbols::
4280 * Multiline Macro Symbols::
4281 * Objective-C Method Symbols::
4282 * Java Symbols::
4283 * Statement Block Symbols::
4284 * K&R Symbols::
4285 @end menu
4286
4287 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4288 @node Function Symbols, Class Symbols, Syntactic Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4289 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4290 @subsection Function Symbols
4291 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4292
4293 This example shows a typical function declaration.
4294
4295 @example
4296 1: void
4297 2: swap( int& a, int& b )
4298 3: @{
4299 4: int tmp = a;
4300 5: a = b;
4301 6: b = tmp;
4302 7: int ignored =
4303 8: a + b;
4304 9: @}
4305 @end example
4306
4307 @ssindex topmost-intro
4308 @ssindex topmost-intro-cont
4309 @ssindex defun-open
4310 @ssindex defun-close
4311 @ssindex defun-block-intro
4312 Line 1 shows a @code{topmost-intro} since it is the first line that
4313 introduces a top-level construct. Line 2 is a continuation of the
4314 top-level construct introduction so it has the syntax
4315 @code{topmost-intro-cont}. Line 3 shows a @code{defun-open} since it is
4316 the brace that opens a top-level function definition. Line 9 is the
4317 corresponding
4318 @code{defun-close} since it contains the brace that closes the top-level
4319 function definition. Line 4 is a @code{defun-block-intro}, i.e., it is
4320 the first line of a brace-block, enclosed in a
4321 top-level function definition.
4322
4323 @ssindex statement
4324 @ssindex statement-cont
4325 Lines 5, 6, and 7 are all given @code{statement} syntax since there
4326 isn't much special about them. Note however that line 8 is given
4327 @code{statement-cont} syntax since it continues the statement begun
4328 on the previous line.
4329
4330 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4331 @node Class Symbols, Conditional Construct Symbols, Function Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4332 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4333 @subsection Class related Symbols
4334 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4335
4336 Here's an example which illustrates some C++ class syntactic symbols:
4337
4338 @example
4339 1: class Bass
4340 2: : public Guitar,
4341 3: public Amplifiable
4342 4: @{
4343 5: public:
4344 6: Bass()
4345 7: : eString( new BassString( 0.105 )),
4346 8: aString( new BassString( 0.085 )),
4347 9: dString( new BassString( 0.065 )),
4348 10: gString( new BassString( 0.045 ))
4349 11: @{
4350 12: eString.tune( 'E' );
4351 13: aString.tune( 'A' );
4352 14: dString.tune( 'D' );
4353 15: gString.tune( 'G' );
4354 16: @}
4355 17: friend class Luthier;
4356 18: @};
4357 @end example
4358
4359 @ssindex class-open
4360 @ssindex class-close
4361 As in the previous example, line 1 has the @code{topmost-intro} syntax.
4362 Here however, the brace that opens a C++ class definition on line 4 is
4363 assigned the @code{class-open} syntax. Note that in C++, classes,
4364 structs, and unions are essentially equivalent syntactically (and are
4365 very similar semantically), so replacing the @code{class} keyword in the
4366 example above with @code{struct} or @code{union} would still result in a
4367 syntax of @code{class-open} for line 4 @footnote{This is the case even
4368 for C and Objective-C@. For consistency, structs in all supported
4369 languages are syntactically equivalent to classes. Note however that
4370 the keyword @code{class} is meaningless in C and Objective-C.}.
4371 Similarly, line 18 is assigned @code{class-close} syntax.
4372
4373 @ssindex inher-intro
4374 @ssindex inher-cont
4375 Line 2 introduces the inheritance list for the class so it is assigned
4376 the @code{inher-intro} syntax, and line 3, which continues the
4377 inheritance list is given @code{inher-cont} syntax.
4378
4379 @ssindex access-label
4380 @ssindex inclass
4381 Hitting @kbd{C-c C-s} on line 5 shows the following analysis:
4382
4383 @example
4384 ((inclass 58) (access-label 58))
4385 @end example
4386
4387 @noindent
4388 The primary syntactic symbol for this line is @code{access-label} as
4389 this is a label keyword that specifies access protection in C++. However,
4390 because this line is also a top-level construct inside a class
4391 definition, the analysis actually shows two syntactic symbols. The
4392 other syntactic symbol assigned to this line is @code{inclass}.
4393 Similarly, line 6 is given both @code{inclass} and @code{topmost-intro}
4394 syntax:
4395
4396 @example
4397 ((inclass 58) (topmost-intro 60))
4398 @end example
4399
4400 @ssindex member-init-intro
4401 @ssindex member-init-cont
4402 Line 7 introduces a C++ member initialization list and as such is given
4403 @code{member-init-intro} syntax. Note that in this case it is
4404 @emph{not} assigned @code{inclass} since this is not considered a
4405 top-level construct. Lines 8 through 10 are all assigned
4406 @code{member-init-cont} since they continue the member initialization
4407 list started on line 7.
4408
4409 @cindex in-class inline methods
4410 @ssindex inline-open
4411 @ssindex inline-close
4412 Line 11's analysis is a bit more complicated:
4413
4414 @example
4415 ((inclass 58) (inline-open))
4416 @end example
4417
4418 This line is assigned a syntax of both @code{inline-open} and
4419 @code{inclass} because it opens an @dfn{in-class} C++ inline method
4420 definition. This is distinct from, but related to, the C++ notion of an
4421 inline function in that its definition occurs inside an enclosing class
4422 definition, which in C++ implies that the function should be inlined.
4423 However, if the definition of the @code{Bass} constructor appeared
4424 outside the class definition, the construct would be given the
4425 @code{defun-open} syntax, even if the keyword @code{inline} appeared
4426 before the method name, as in:
4427
4428 @example
4429 1: class Bass
4430 2: : public Guitar,
4431 3: public Amplifiable
4432 4: @{
4433 5: public:
4434 6: Bass();
4435 7: @};
4436 8:
4437 9: inline
4438 10: Bass::Bass()
4439 11: : eString( new BassString( 0.105 )),
4440 12: aString( new BassString( 0.085 )),
4441 13: dString( new BassString( 0.065 )),
4442 14: gString( new BassString( 0.045 ))
4443 15: @{
4444 16: eString.tune( 'E' );
4445 17: aString.tune( 'A' );
4446 18: dString.tune( 'D' );
4447 19: gString.tune( 'G' );
4448 20: @}
4449 @end example
4450
4451 @ssindex friend
4452 Returning to the previous example, line 16 is given @code{inline-close}
4453 syntax, while line 12 is given @code{defun-block-open} syntax, and lines
4454 13 through 15 are all given @code{statement} syntax. Line 17 is
4455 interesting in that its syntactic analysis list contains three
4456 elements:
4457
4458 @example
4459 ((inclass 58) (topmost-intro 380) (friend))
4460 @end example
4461
4462 The @code{friend} and @code{inline-open} syntactic symbols are
4463 modifiers that do not have anchor positions.
4464
4465 @ssindex template-args-cont
4466 Template definitions introduce yet another syntactic symbol:
4467
4468 @example
4469 1: ThingManager <int,
4470 2: Framework::Callback *,
4471 3: Mutex> framework_callbacks;
4472 @end example
4473
4474 Here, line 1 is analyzed as a @code{topmost-intro}, but lines 2 and 3
4475 are both analyzed as @code{template-args-cont} lines.
4476
4477 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4478 @node Conditional Construct Symbols, Switch Statement Symbols, Class Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4479 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4480 @subsection Conditional Construct Symbols
4481 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4482
4483 Here is a (totally contrived) example which illustrates how syntax is
4484 assigned to various conditional constructs:
4485
4486 @example
4487 1: void spam( int index )
4488 2: @{
4489 3: for( int i=0; i<index; i++ )
4490 4: @{
4491 5: if( i == 10 )
4492 6: do_something_special();
4493 7: else
4494 8: silly_label:
4495 9: do_something( i );
4496 10: @}
4497 11: do @{
4498 12: another_thing( i-- );
4499 13: @}
4500 14: while( i > 0 );
4501 15: @}
4502 @end example
4503
4504 Only the lines that illustrate new syntactic symbols will be discussed.
4505
4506 @ssindex substatement-open
4507 @ssindex statement-block-intro
4508 @ssindex block-close
4509 Line 4 has a brace which opens a conditional's substatement block. It
4510 is thus assigned @code{substatement-open} syntax, and since line 5 is
4511 the first line in the substatement block, it is assigned
4512 @code{statement-block-intro} syntax. Line 10 contains the brace
4513 that closes the inner substatement block, and is therefore given the
4514 syntax @code{block-close}@footnote{@code{block-open} is used only for
4515 ``free-standing'' blocks, and is somewhat rare (@pxref{Literal
4516 Symbols} for an example.)}. Line 13 is treated the same way.
4517
4518 @ssindex substatement
4519 Lines 6 and 9 are also substatements of conditionals, but since they
4520 don't start blocks they are given @code{substatement} syntax
4521 instead of @code{substatement-open}.
4522
4523 @ssindex substatement-label
4524 Line 8 contains a label, which is normally given @code{label} syntax.
4525 This one is however a bit special since it's between a conditional and
4526 its substatement. It's analyzed as @code{substatement-label} to let you
4527 handle this rather odd case differently from normal labels.
4528
4529 @ssindex else-clause
4530 @ssindex catch-clause
4531 Line 7 start with an @code{else} that matches the @code{if} statement on
4532 line 5. It is therefore given the @code{else-clause} syntax and is
4533 anchored on the matching @code{if}. The @code{try}-@code{catch}
4534 constructs in C++ and Java are treated this way too, except that
4535 @code{catch} and (in Java) @code{finally}, are marked with
4536 @code{catch-clause}.
4537
4538 @ssindex do-while-closure
4539 The @code{while} construct on line 14 that closes a @code{do}
4540 conditional is given the special syntax @code{do-while-closure} if it
4541 appears on a line by itself. Note that if the @code{while} appeared on
4542 the same line as the preceding close brace, that line would still have
4543 @code{block-close} syntax.
4544
4545 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4546 @node Switch Statement Symbols, Brace List Symbols, Conditional Construct Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4547 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4548 @subsection Switch Statement Symbols
4549 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4550
4551 Switch statements have their own set of syntactic symbols. Here's an
4552 example:
4553
4554 @example
4555 1: void spam( enum Ingredient i )
4556 2: @{
4557 3: switch( i ) @{
4558 4: case Ham:
4559 5: be_a_pig();
4560 6: break;
4561 7: case Salt:
4562 8: drink_some_water();
4563 9: break;
4564 10: default:
4565 11: @{
4566 12: what_is_it();
4567 13: break;
4568 14: @}
4569 15: @}
4570 14: @}
4571 @end example
4572
4573 @ssindex case-label
4574 @ssindex statement-case-intro
4575 @ssindex statement-case-open
4576 Here, lines 4, 7, and 10 are all assigned @code{case-label} syntax,
4577 while lines 5 and 8 are assigned @code{statement-case-intro}. Line 11
4578 is treated slightly differently since it contains a brace that opens a
4579 block; it is given @code{statement-case-open} syntax.
4580
4581 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4582 @node Brace List Symbols, External Scope Symbols, Switch Statement Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4583 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4584 @subsection Brace List Symbols
4585 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4586
4587 @cindex brace lists
4588 There are a set of syntactic symbols that are used to recognize
4589 constructs inside of brace lists. A brace list is defined as an
4590 @code{enum} or aggregate initializer list, such as might statically
4591 initialize an array of structs. The three special aggregate constructs
4592 in Pike, @code{(@{ @})}, @code{([ ])} and @code{(< >)}, are treated as
4593 brace lists too. An example:
4594
4595 @example
4596 1: static char* ingredients[] =
4597 2: @{
4598 3: "Ham",
4599 4: "Salt",
4600 5: NULL
4601 6: @};
4602 @end example
4603
4604 @ssindex brace-list-open
4605 @ssindex brace-list-intro
4606 @ssindex brace-list-close
4607 @ssindex brace-list-entry
4608 Following convention, line 2 in this example is assigned
4609 @code{brace-list-open} syntax, and line 3 is assigned
4610 @code{brace-list-intro} syntax. Likewise, line 6 is assigned
4611 @code{brace-list-close} syntax. Lines 4 and 5 however, are assigned
4612 @code{brace-list-entry} syntax, as would all subsequent lines in this
4613 initializer list.
4614
4615 @ssindex brace-entry-open
4616 Your static initializer might be initializing nested structures, for
4617 example:
4618
4619 @example
4620 1: struct intpairs[] =
4621 2: @{
4622 3: @{ 1, 2 @},
4623 4: @{
4624 5: 3,
4625 6: 4
4626 7: @}
4627 8: @{ 1,
4628 9: 2 @},
4629 10: @{ 3, 4 @}
4630 11: @};
4631 @end example
4632
4633 Here, you've already seen the analysis of lines 1, 2, 3, and 11. On
4634 line 4, things get interesting; this line is assigned
4635 @code{brace-entry-open} syntactic symbol because it's a bracelist entry
4636 line that starts with an open brace. Lines 5 and 6 (and line 9) are
4637 pretty standard, and line 7 is a @code{brace-list-close} as you'd
4638 expect. Once again, line 8 is assigned as @code{brace-entry-open} as is
4639 line 10.
4640
4641 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4642 @node External Scope Symbols, Paren List Symbols, Brace List Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4643 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4644 @subsection External Scope Symbols
4645 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4646
4647 External language definition blocks also have their own syntactic
4648 symbols. In this example:
4649
4650 @example
4651 1: extern "C"
4652 2: @{
4653 3: int thing_one( int );
4654 4: int thing_two( double );
4655 5: @}
4656 @end example
4657
4658 @ssindex extern-lang-open
4659 @ssindex extern-lang-close
4660 @ssindex inextern-lang
4661 @ssindex inclass
4662 @noindent
4663 line 2 is given the @code{extern-lang-open} syntax, while line 5 is given
4664 the @code{extern-lang-close} syntax. The analysis for line 3 yields:
4665
4666 @example
4667 ((inextern-lang) (topmost-intro 14))
4668 @end example
4669
4670 @noindent
4671 where @code{inextern-lang} is a modifier similar in purpose to
4672 @code{inclass}.
4673
4674 There are various other top level blocks like @code{extern}, and they
4675 are all treated in the same way except that the symbols are named after
4676 the keyword that introduces the block. E.g., C++ namespace blocks get
4677 the three symbols @code{namespace-open}, @code{namespace-close} and
4678 @code{innamespace}. The currently recognized top level blocks are:
4679
4680 @table @asis
4681 @item @code{extern-lang-open}, @code{extern-lang-close}, @code{inextern-lang}
4682 @code{extern} blocks in C and C++.@footnote{These should logically be
4683 named @code{extern-open}, @code{extern-close} and @code{inextern}, but
4684 that isn't the case for historical reasons.}
4685
4686 @item @code{namespace-open}, @code{namespace-close}, @code{innamespace}
4687 @ssindex namespace-open
4688 @ssindex namespace-close
4689 @ssindex innamespace
4690 @code{namespace} blocks in C++.
4691
4692 @item @code{module-open}, @code{module-close}, @code{inmodule}
4693 @ssindex module-open
4694 @ssindex module-close
4695 @ssindex inmodule
4696 @code{module} blocks in CORBA IDL.
4697
4698 @item @code{composition-open}, @code{composition-close}, @code{incomposition}
4699 @ssindex composition-open
4700 @ssindex composition-close
4701 @ssindex incomposition
4702 @code{composition} blocks in CORBA CIDL.
4703 @end table
4704
4705 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4706 @node Paren List Symbols, Literal Symbols, External Scope Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4707 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4708 @subsection Parenthesis (Argument) List Symbols
4709 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4710
4711 A number of syntactic symbols are associated with parenthesis lists,
4712 a.k.a argument lists, as found in function declarations and function
4713 calls. This example illustrates these:
4714
4715 @example
4716 1: void a_function( int line1,
4717 2: int line2 );
4718 3:
4719 4: void a_longer_function(
4720 5: int line1,
4721 6: int line2
4722 7: );
4723 8:
4724 9: void call_them( int line1, int line2 )
4725 10: @{
4726 11: a_function(
4727 12: line1,
4728 13: line2
4729 14: );
4730 15:
4731 16: a_longer_function( line1,
4732 17: line2 );
4733 18: @}
4734 @end example
4735
4736 @ssindex arglist-intro
4737 @ssindex arglist-close
4738 Lines 5 and 12 are assigned @code{arglist-intro} syntax since they are
4739 the first line following the open parenthesis, and lines 7 and 14 are
4740 assigned @code{arglist-close} syntax since they contain the parenthesis
4741 that closes the argument list.
4742
4743 @ssindex arglist-cont-nonempty
4744 @ssindex arglist-cont
4745 Lines that continue argument lists can be assigned one of two syntactic
4746 symbols. For example, Lines 2 and 17
4747 are assigned @code{arglist-cont-nonempty} syntax. What this means
4748 is that they continue an argument list, but that the line containing the
4749 parenthesis that opens the list is @emph{not empty} following the open
4750 parenthesis. Contrast this against lines 6 and 13 which are assigned
4751 @code{arglist-cont} syntax. This is because the parenthesis that opens
4752 their argument lists is the last character on that line.
4753
4754 Syntactic elements with @code{arglist-intro},
4755 @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}, and @code{arglist-close} contain two
4756 buffer positions: the anchor position (the beginning of the
4757 declaration or statement) and the position of the open parenthesis.
4758 The latter position can be used in a line-up function (@pxref{Line-Up
4759 Functions}).
4760
4761 Note that there is no @code{arglist-open} syntax. This is because any
4762 parenthesis that opens an argument list, appearing on a separate line,
4763 is assigned the @code{statement-cont} syntax instead.
4764
4765 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4766 @node Literal Symbols, Multiline Macro Symbols, Paren List Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4767 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4768 @subsection Comment String Label and Macro Symbols
4769 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4770
4771 A few miscellaneous syntactic symbols that haven't been previously
4772 covered are illustrated by this C++ example:
4773
4774 @example
4775 1: void Bass::play( int volume )
4776 2: const
4777 3: @{
4778 4: /* this line starts a multiline
4779 5: * comment. This line should get 'c' syntax */
4780 6:
4781 7: char* a_multiline_string = "This line starts a multiline \
4782 8: string. This line should get 'string' syntax.";
4783 9:
4784 10: note:
4785 11: @{
4786 12: #ifdef LOCK
4787 13: Lock acquire();
4788 14: #endif // LOCK
4789 15: slap_pop();
4790 16: cout << "I played "
4791 17: << "a note\n";
4792 18: @}
4793 19: @}
4794 @end example
4795
4796 The lines to note in this example include:
4797
4798 @itemize @bullet
4799 @item
4800 @ssindex func-decl-cont
4801 Line 2 is assigned the @code{func-decl-cont} syntax.
4802
4803 @item
4804 @ssindex comment-intro
4805 Line 4 is assigned both @code{defun-block-intro} @emph{and}
4806 @code{comment-intro} syntax. A syntactic element with
4807 @code{comment-intro} has no anchor point. It is always accompanied
4808 by another syntactic element which does have one.
4809
4810 @item
4811 @ssindex c
4812 Line 5 is assigned @code{c} syntax.
4813
4814 @item
4815 @cindex syntactic whitespace
4816 Line 6 which, even though it contains nothing but whitespace, is
4817 assigned @code{defun-block-intro}. Note that the appearance of the
4818 comment on lines 4 and 5 do not cause line 6 to be assigned
4819 @code{statement} syntax because comments are considered to be
4820 @dfn{syntactic whitespace}, which are ignored when analyzing
4821 code.
4822
4823 @item
4824 @ssindex string
4825 Line 8 is assigned @code{string} syntax.
4826
4827 @item
4828 @ssindex label
4829 Line 10 is assigned @code{label} syntax.
4830
4831 @item
4832 @ssindex block-open
4833 Line 11 is assigned @code{block-open} as well as @code{statement}
4834 syntax. A @code{block-open} syntactic element doesn't have an anchor
4835 position, since it always appears with another syntactic element which
4836 does have one.
4837
4838 @item
4839 @ssindex cpp-macro
4840 Lines 12 and 14 are assigned @code{cpp-macro} syntax in addition to the
4841 normal syntactic symbols (@code{statement-block-intro} and
4842 @code{statement}, respectively). Normally @code{cpp-macro} is
4843 configured to cancel out the normal syntactic context to make all
4844 preprocessor directives stick to the first column, but that's easily
4845 changed if you want preprocessor directives to be indented like the rest
4846 of the code. Like @code{comment-intro}, a syntactic element with
4847 @code{cpp-macro} doesn't contain an anchor position.
4848
4849 @item
4850 @ssindex stream-op
4851 Line 17 is assigned @code{stream-op} syntax.
4852 @end itemize
4853
4854 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4855 @node Multiline Macro Symbols, Objective-C Method Symbols, Literal Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4856 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4857 @subsection Multiline Macro Symbols
4858 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4859
4860 @cindex multiline macros
4861 @cindex syntactic whitespace
4862 @ssindex cpp-define-intro
4863 @ssindex cpp-macro-cont
4864 Multiline preprocessor macro definitions are normally handled just like
4865 other code, i.e., the lines inside them are indented according to the
4866 syntactic analysis of the preceding lines inside the macro. The first
4867 line inside a macro definition (i.e., the line after the starting line of
4868 the cpp directive itself) gets @code{cpp-define-intro}. In this example:
4869
4870 @example
4871 1: #define LIST_LOOP(cons, listp) \
4872 2: for (cons = listp; !NILP (cons); cons = XCDR (cons)) \
4873 3: if (!CONSP (cons)) \
4874 4: signal_error ("Invalid list format", listp); \
4875 5: else
4876 @end example
4877
4878 @noindent
4879 line 1 is given the syntactic symbol @code{cpp-macro}. The first line
4880 of a cpp directive is always given that symbol. Line 2 is given
4881 @code{cpp-define-intro}, so that you can give the macro body as a whole
4882 some extra indentation. Lines 3 through 5 are then analyzed as normal
4883 code, i.e., @code{substatement} on lines 3 and 4, and @code{else-clause}
4884 on line 5.
4885
4886 The syntactic analysis inside macros can be turned off with
4887 @code{c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros} (@pxref{Custom Macros}). In
4888 that case, lines 2 through 5 would all be given @code{cpp-macro-cont}
4889 with an anchor position pointing to the @code{#} which starts the cpp
4890 directive@footnote{This is how @ccmode{} 5.28 and earlier analyzed
4891 macros.}.
4892
4893 @xref{Custom Macros}, for more info about the treatment of macros.
4894
4895 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4896 @node Objective-C Method Symbols, Java Symbols, Multiline Macro Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4897 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4898 @subsection Objective-C Method Symbols
4899 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4900
4901 In Objective-C buffers, there are three additional syntactic symbols
4902 assigned to various message calling constructs. Here's an example
4903 illustrating these:
4904
4905 @example
4906 1: - (void)setDelegate:anObject
4907 2: withStuff:stuff
4908 3: @{
4909 4: [delegate masterWillRebind:self
4910 5: toDelegate:anObject
4911 6: withExtraStuff:stuff];
4912 7: @}
4913 @end example
4914
4915 @ssindex objc-method-intro
4916 @ssindex objc-method-args-cont
4917 @ssindex objc-method-call-cont
4918 Here, line 1 is assigned @code{objc-method-intro} syntax, and line 2 is
4919 assigned @code{objc-method-args-cont} syntax. Lines 5 and 6 are both
4920 assigned @code{objc-method-call-cont} syntax.
4921
4922 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4923 @node Java Symbols, Statement Block Symbols, Objective-C Method Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4924 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4925 @subsection Java Symbols
4926 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4927
4928 Java has a concept of anonymous classes which can look something like
4929 this:
4930
4931 @example
4932 1: @@Test
4933 2: public void watch(Observable o) @{
4934 3: @@NonNull
4935 4: Observer obs = new Observer() @{
4936 5: public void update(Observable o, Object arg) @{
4937 6: history.addElement(arg);
4938 7: @}
4939 8: @};
4940 9: o.addObserver(obs);
4941 10: @}
4942 @end example
4943
4944 @ssindex inexpr-class
4945 The brace following the @code{new} operator opens the anonymous class.
4946 Lines 5 and 8 are assigned the @code{inexpr-class} syntax, besides the
4947 @code{inclass} symbol used in normal classes. Thus, the class will be
4948 indented just like a normal class, with the added indentation given to
4949 @code{inexpr-class}. An @code{inexpr-class} syntactic element doesn't
4950 have an anchor position.
4951
4952 @ssindex annotation-top-cont
4953 @ssindex annotation-var-cont
4954 Line 2 is assigned the @code{annotation-top-cont} syntax, due to it being a
4955 continuation of a topmost introduction with an annotation symbol preceding
4956 the current line. Similarly, line 4 is assigned the @code{annotation-var-cont}
4957 syntax due to it being a continuation of a variable declaration where preceding
4958 the declaration is an annotation.
4959
4960 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4961 @node Statement Block Symbols, K&R Symbols, Java Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4962 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4963 @subsection Statement Block Symbols
4964 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4965
4966 There are a few occasions where a statement block might be used inside
4967 an expression. One is in C or C++ code using the gcc extension for
4968 this, e.g.:
4969
4970 @example
4971 1: int res = (@{
4972 2: int y = foo (); int z;
4973 3: if (y > 0) z = y; else z = - y;
4974 4: z;
4975 5: @});
4976 @end example
4977
4978 @ssindex inexpr-statement
4979 Lines 2 and 5 get the @code{inexpr-statement} syntax, besides the
4980 symbols they'd get in a normal block. Therefore, the indentation put on
4981 @code{inexpr-statement} is added to the normal statement block
4982 indentation. An @code{inexpr-statement} syntactic element doesn't
4983 contain an anchor position.
4984
4985 In Pike code, there are a few other situations where blocks occur inside
4986 statements, as illustrated here:
4987
4988 @example
4989 1: array itgob()
4990 2: @{
4991 3: string s = map (backtrace()[-2][3..],
4992 4: lambda
4993 5: (mixed arg)
4994 6: @{
4995 7: return sprintf ("%t", arg);
4996 8: @}) * ", " + "\n";
4997 9: return catch @{
4998 10: write (s + "\n");
4999 11: @};
5000 12: @}
5001 @end example
5002
5003 @ssindex inlambda
5004 @ssindex lambda-intro-cont
5005 Lines 4 through 8 contain a lambda function, which @ccmode{} recognizes
5006 by the @code{lambda} keyword. If the function argument list is put
5007 on a line of its own, as in line 5, it gets the @code{lambda-intro-cont}
5008 syntax. The function body is handled as an inline method body, with the
5009 addition of the @code{inlambda} syntactic symbol. This means that line
5010 6 gets @code{inlambda} and @code{inline-open}, and line 8 gets
5011 @code{inline-close}@footnote{You might wonder why it doesn't get
5012 @code{inlambda} too. It's because the closing brace is relative to the
5013 opening brace, which stands on its own line in this example. If the
5014 opening brace was hanging on the previous line, then the closing brace
5015 would get the @code{inlambda} syntax too to be indented correctly.}.
5016
5017 @ssindex inexpr-statement
5018 On line 9, @code{catch} is a special function taking a statement block
5019 as its argument. The block is handled as an in-expression statement
5020 with the @code{inexpr-statement} syntax, just like the gcc extended C
5021 example above. The other similar special function, @code{gauge}, is
5022 handled like this too.
5023
5024 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5025 @node K&R Symbols, , Statement Block Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
5026 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5027 @subsection K&R Symbols
5028 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5029
5030 @ssindex knr-argdecl-intro
5031 @ssindex knr-argdecl
5032 Two other syntactic symbols can appear in old style, non-prototyped C
5033 code @footnote{a.k.a.@: K&R C, or Kernighan & Ritchie C}:
5034
5035 @example
5036 1: int add_three_integers(a, b, c)
5037 2: int a;
5038 3: int b;
5039 4: int c;
5040 5: @{
5041 6: return a + b + c;
5042 7: @}
5043 @end example
5044
5045 Here, line 2 is the first line in an argument declaration list and so is
5046 given the @code{knr-argdecl-intro} syntactic symbol. Subsequent lines
5047 (i.e., lines 3 and 4 in this example), are given @code{knr-argdecl}
5048 syntax.
5049
5050
5051 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5052 @node Indentation Calculation, , Syntactic Symbols, Indentation Engine Basics
5053 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5054 @section Indentation Calculation
5055 @cindex indentation
5056 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5057
5058 Indentation for a line is calculated from the syntactic context
5059 (@pxref{Syntactic Analysis}).
5060
5061 First, a buffer position is found whose column will be the base for the
5062 indentation calculation. It's the anchor position in the first
5063 syntactic element that provides one that is used. If no syntactic
5064 element has an anchor position then column zero is used.
5065
5066 Second, the syntactic symbols in each syntactic element are looked up
5067 in the @code{c-offsets-alist} style variable
5068 (@pxref{c-offsets-alist}), which is an association list of syntactic
5069 symbols and the offsets to apply for those symbols. These offsets are
5070 added together with the base column to produce the new indentation
5071 column.
5072
5073 Let's use our two code examples above to see how this works. Here is
5074 our first example again:
5075
5076 @example
5077 1: void swap( int& a, int& b )
5078 2: @{
5079 3: int tmp = a;
5080 4: a = b;
5081 5: b = tmp;
5082 6: @}
5083 @end example
5084
5085 Let's say point is on line 3 and we hit the @key{TAB} key to reindent
5086 the line. The syntactic context for that line is:
5087
5088 @example
5089 ((defun-block-intro 29))
5090 @end example
5091
5092 @noindent
5093 Since buffer position 29 is the first and only anchor position in the
5094 list, @ccmode{} goes there and asks for the current column. This brace
5095 is in column zero, so @ccmode{} uses @samp{0} as the base column.
5096
5097 Next, @ccmode{} looks up @code{defun-block-intro} in the
5098 @code{c-offsets-alist} style variable. Let's say it finds the value
5099 @samp{4}; it adds this to the base column @samp{0}, yielding a running
5100 total indentation of 4 spaces.
5101
5102 Since there is only one syntactic element on the list for this line,
5103 indentation calculation is complete, and the total indentation for the
5104 line is 4 spaces.
5105
5106 Here's another example:
5107
5108 @example
5109 1: int add( int val, int incr, int doit )
5110 2: @{
5111 3: if( doit )
5112 4: @{
5113 5: return( val + incr );
5114 6: @}
5115 7: return( val );
5116 8: @}
5117 @end example
5118
5119 If we were to hit @kbd{TAB} on line 4 in the above example, the same
5120 basic process is performed, despite the differences in the syntactic
5121 context. The context for this line is:
5122
5123 @example
5124 ((substatement-open 46))
5125 @end example
5126
5127 Here, @ccmode{} goes to buffer position 46, which is the @samp{i} in
5128 @code{if} on line 3. This character is in the fourth column on that
5129 line so the base column is @samp{4}. Then @ccmode{} looks up the
5130 @code{substatement-open} symbol in @code{c-offsets-alist}. Let's say it
5131 finds the value @samp{4}. It's added with the base column and yields an
5132 indentation for the line of 8 spaces.
5133
5134 Simple, huh?
5135
5136 Actually, it's a bit more complicated than that since the entries on
5137 @code{c-offsets-alist} can be much more than plain offsets.
5138 @xref{c-offsets-alist}, for the full story.
5139
5140 Anyway, the mode usually just does The Right Thing without you having to
5141 think about it in this much detail. But when customizing indentation,
5142 it's helpful to understand the general indentation model being used.
5143
5144 As you configure @ccmode{}, you might want to set the variable
5145 @code{c-echo-syntactic-information-p} to non-@code{nil} so that the
5146 syntactic context and calculated offset always is echoed in the
5147 minibuffer when you hit @kbd{TAB}.
5148
5149
5150 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5151 @node Customizing Indentation, Custom Macros, Indentation Engine Basics, Top
5152 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5153 @chapter Customizing Indentation
5154 @cindex customization, indentation
5155 @cindex indentation
5156 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5157
5158 The principal variable for customizing indentation is the style
5159 variable @code{c-offsets-alist}, which gives an @dfn{offset} (an
5160 indentation rule) for each syntactic symbol. Its structure and
5161 semantics are completely described in @ref{c-offsets-alist}. The
5162 various ways you can set the variable, including the use of the
5163 @ccmode{} style system, are described in @ref{Config Basics} and its
5164 sections, in particular @ref{Style Variables}.
5165
5166 The simplest and most used kind of ``offset'' setting in
5167 @code{c-offsets-alist} is in terms of multiples of
5168 @code{c-basic-offset}:
5169
5170 @defopt c-basic-offset
5171 @vindex basic-offset (c-)
5172 This style variable holds the basic offset between indentation levels.
5173 It's factory default is 4, but all the built-in styles set it
5174 themselves, to some value between 2 (for @code{gnu} style) and 8 (for
5175 @code{bsd}, @code{linux}, and @code{python} styles).
5176 @end defopt
5177
5178 The most flexible ``offset'' setting you can make in
5179 @code{c-offsets-alist} is a line-up function (or even a list of them),
5180 either one supplied by @ccmode{} (@pxref{Line-Up Functions}) or one
5181 you write yourself (@pxref{Custom Line-Up}).
5182
5183 Finally, in @ref{Other Indentation} you'll find the tool of last
5184 resort: a hook which is called after a line has been indented. You
5185 can install functions here to make ad-hoc adjustments to any line's
5186 indentation.
5187
5188 @menu
5189 * c-offsets-alist::
5190 * Interactive Customization::
5191 * Line-Up Functions::
5192 * Custom Line-Up::
5193 * Other Indentation::
5194 @end menu
5195
5196
5197 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5198 @node c-offsets-alist, Interactive Customization, Customizing Indentation, Customizing Indentation
5199 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5200 @section c-offsets-alist
5201 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5202
5203 This section explains the structure and semantics of the style
5204 variable @code{c-offsets-alist}, the principal variable for configuring
5205 indentation. Details of how to set it up, and its relationship to
5206 @ccmode{}'s style system are given in @ref{Style Variables}.
5207
5208 @defopt c-offsets-alist
5209 @vindex offsets-alist (c-)
5210 This is an alist which associates an offset with each syntactic
5211 symbol. This @dfn{offset} is a rule specifying how to indent a line
5212 whose syntactic context matches the symbol. @xref{Syntactic
5213 Analysis}.
5214
5215 Note that the buffer-local binding of this alist in a @ccmode{} buffer
5216 contains an entry for @emph{every} syntactic symbol. Its global
5217 binding and its settings within style specifications usually contain
5218 only a few entries. @xref{Style Variables}.
5219
5220 The offset specification associated with any particular syntactic
5221 symbol can be an integer, a variable name, a vector, a function or
5222 lambda expression, a list, or one of the following special symbols:
5223 @code{+}, @code{-}, @code{++}, @code{--}, @code{*}, or @code{/}. The
5224 meanings of these values are described in detail below.
5225
5226 Here is an example fragment of a @code{c-offsets-alist}, showing some
5227 of these kinds of offsets:
5228
5229 @example
5230 ((statement . 0)
5231 (substatement . +)
5232 (cpp-macro . [0])
5233 (topmost-intro-cont . c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont)
5234 (statement-block-intro . (add c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block
5235 c-indent-multi-line-block))
5236 @dots{}
5237 @*)
5238 @end example
5239 @end defopt
5240
5241 @deffn Command c-set-offset (@kbd{C-c C-o})
5242 @findex set-offset (c-)
5243 @kindex C-c C-o
5244 This command changes the entry for a syntactic symbol in the current
5245 binding of @code{c-offsets-alist}, or it inserts a new entry if there
5246 isn't already one for that syntactic symbol.
5247
5248 You can use @code{c-set-offset} interactively within a @ccmode{}
5249 buffer to make experimental changes to your indentation settings.
5250 @kbd{C-c C-o} prompts you for the syntactic symbol to change
5251 (defaulting to that of the current line) and the new offset
5252 (defaulting to the current offset).
5253
5254 @code{c-set-offset} takes two arguments when used programmatically:
5255 @var{symbol}, the syntactic element symbol to change and @var{offset},
5256 the new offset for that syntactic element. You can call the command
5257 in your @file{.emacs} to change the global binding of
5258 @code{c-offsets-alist} (@pxref{Style Variables}); you can use it in a
5259 hook function to make changes from the current style. @ccmode{}
5260 itself uses this function when initializing styles.
5261 @end deffn
5262
5263 @cindex offset specification
5264 The ``offset specifications'' in @code{c-offsets-alist} can be any of
5265 the following:
5266
5267 @table @asis
5268 @item An integer
5269 The integer specifies a relative offset. All relative
5270 offsets@footnote{The syntactic context @code{@w{((defun-block-intro
5271 2724) (comment-intro))}} would likely have two relative offsets.} will
5272 be added together and used to calculate the indentation relative to an
5273 anchor position earlier in the buffer. @xref{Indentation
5274 Calculation}, for details. Most of the time, it's probably better to
5275 use one of the special symbols like @code{+} than an integer (apart
5276 from zero).
5277
5278 @item One of the symbols @code{+}, @code{-}, @code{++}, @code{--}, @code{*}, or @code{/}
5279 These special symbols describe a relative offset in multiples of
5280 @code{c-basic-offset}:
5281
5282 By defining a style's indentation in terms of @code{c-basic-offset},
5283 you can change the amount of whitespace given to an indentation level
5284 while maintaining the same basic shape of your code. Here are the
5285 values that the special symbols correspond to:
5286
5287 @table @code
5288 @item +
5289 @code{c-basic-offset} times 1
5290 @item -
5291 @code{c-basic-offset} times @minus{}1
5292 @item ++
5293 @code{c-basic-offset} times 2
5294 @item --
5295 @code{c-basic-offset} times @minus{}2
5296 @item *
5297 @code{c-basic-offset} times 0.5
5298 @item /
5299 @code{c-basic-offset} times @minus{}0.5
5300 @end table
5301
5302 @item A vector
5303 The first element of the vector, an integer, sets the absolute
5304 indentation column. This will override any previously calculated
5305 indentation, but won't override relative indentation calculated from
5306 syntactic elements later on in the syntactic context of the line being
5307 indented. @xref{Indentation Calculation}. Any elements in the vector
5308 beyond the first will be ignored.
5309
5310 @item A function or lambda expression
5311 The function will be called and its return value will in turn be
5312 evaluated as an offset specification. Functions are useful when more
5313 context than just the syntactic symbol is needed to get the desired
5314 indentation. @xref{Line-Up Functions}, and @ref{Custom Line-Up}, for
5315 details about them.
5316
5317 @item A symbol with a variable binding
5318 If the symbol also has a function binding, the function takes
5319 precedence over the variable. Otherwise the value of the variable is
5320 used. It must be an integer (which is used as relative offset) or a
5321 vector (an absolute offset).
5322
5323 @item A list
5324 The offset can also be a list containing several offset
5325 specifications; these are evaluated recursively and combined. A list
5326 is typically only useful when some of the offsets are line-up
5327 functions. A common strategy is calling a sequence of functions in
5328 turn until one of them recognizes that it is appropriate for the
5329 source line and returns a non-@code{nil} value.
5330
5331 @code{nil} values are always ignored when the offsets are combined.
5332 The first element of the list specifies the method of combining the
5333 non-@code{nil} offsets from the remaining elements:
5334
5335 @table @code
5336 @item first
5337 Use the first offset that doesn't evaluate to @code{nil}. Subsequent
5338 elements of the list don't get evaluated.
5339 @item min
5340 Use the minimum of all the offsets. All must be either relative or
5341 absolute; they can't be mixed.
5342 @item max
5343 Use the maximum of all the offsets. All must be either relative or
5344 absolute; they can't be mixed.
5345 @item add
5346 Add all the evaluated offsets together. Exactly one of them may be
5347 absolute, in which case the result is absolute. Any relative offsets
5348 that preceded the absolute one in the list will be ignored in that case.
5349 @end table
5350
5351 As a compatibility measure, if the first element is none of the above
5352 then it too will be taken as an offset specification and the whole list
5353 will be combined according to the method @code{first}.
5354 @end table
5355
5356 @vindex c-strict-syntax-p
5357 @vindex strict-syntax-p (c-)
5358 If an offset specification evaluates to @code{nil}, then a relative
5359 offset of 0 (zero) is used@footnote{There is however a variable
5360 @code{c-strict-syntax-p} that when set to non-@code{nil} will cause an
5361 error to be signaled in that case. It's now considered obsolete since
5362 it doesn't work well with some of the alignment functions that return
5363 @code{nil} instead of zero. You should therefore leave
5364 @code{c-strict-syntax-p} set to @code{nil}.}.
5365
5366 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5367 @node Interactive Customization, Line-Up Functions, c-offsets-alist, Customizing Indentation
5368 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5369 @section Interactive Customization
5370 @cindex customization, interactive
5371 @cindex interactive customization
5372 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5373
5374 As an example of how to customize indentation, let's change the
5375 style of this example@footnote{In this and subsequent examples, the
5376 original code is formatted using the @samp{gnu} style unless otherwise
5377 indicated. @xref{Styles}.}:
5378
5379 @example
5380 @group
5381 1: int add( int val, int incr, int doit )
5382 2: @{
5383 3: if( doit )
5384 4: @{
5385 5: return( val + incr );
5386 6: @}
5387 7: return( val );
5388 8: @}
5389 @end group
5390 @end example
5391
5392 @noindent
5393 to:
5394
5395 @example
5396 @group
5397 1: int add( int val, int incr, int doit )
5398 2: @{
5399 3: if( doit )
5400 4: @{
5401 5: return( val + incr );
5402 6: @}
5403 7: return( val );
5404 8: @}
5405 @end group
5406 @end example
5407
5408 In other words, we want to change the indentation of braces that open a
5409 block following a condition so that the braces line up under the
5410 conditional, instead of being indented. Notice that the construct we
5411 want to change starts on line 4. To change the indentation of a line,
5412 we need to see which syntactic symbols affect the offset calculations
5413 for that line. Hitting @kbd{C-c C-s} on line 4 yields:
5414
5415 @example
5416 ((substatement-open 44))
5417 @end example
5418
5419 @noindent
5420 so we know that to change the offset of the open brace, we need to
5421 change the indentation for the @code{substatement-open} syntactic
5422 symbol.
5423
5424 To do this interactively, just hit @kbd{C-c C-o}. This prompts
5425 you for the syntactic symbol to change, providing a reasonable default.
5426 In this case, the default is @code{substatement-open}, which is just the
5427 syntactic symbol we want to change!
5428
5429 After you hit return, @ccmode{} will then prompt you for the new
5430 offset value, with the old value as the default. The default in this
5431 case is @samp{+}, but we want no extra indentation so enter
5432 @samp{0} and @kbd{RET}. This will associate the offset 0 with the
5433 syntactic symbol @code{substatement-open}.
5434
5435 To check your changes quickly, just hit @kbd{C-c C-q}
5436 (@code{c-indent-defun}) to reindent the entire function. The example
5437 should now look like:
5438
5439 @example
5440 @group
5441 1: int add( int val, int incr, int doit )
5442 2: @{
5443 3: if( doit )
5444 4: @{
5445 5: return( val + incr );
5446 6: @}
5447 7: return( val );
5448 8: @}
5449 @end group
5450 @end example
5451
5452 Notice how just changing the open brace offset on line 4 is all we
5453 needed to do. Since the other affected lines are indented relative to
5454 line 4, they are automatically indented the way you'd expect. For more
5455 complicated examples, this might not always work. The general approach
5456 to take is to always start adjusting offsets for lines higher up in the
5457 file, then reindent and see if any following lines need further
5458 adjustments.
5459
5460 @c Move this bit to "Styles" (2005/10/7)
5461 @deffn Command c-set-offset symbol offset
5462 @findex set-offset (c-)
5463 @kindex C-c C-o
5464 This is the command bound to @kbd{C-c C-o}. It provides a convenient
5465 way to set offsets on @code{c-offsets-alist} both interactively (see
5466 the example above) and from your mode hook.
5467
5468 It takes two arguments when used programmatically: @var{symbol} is the
5469 syntactic element symbol to change and @var{offset} is the new offset
5470 for that syntactic element.
5471 @end deffn
5472 @c End of MOVE THIS BIT.
5473
5474 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5475 @node Line-Up Functions, Custom Line-Up, Interactive Customization, Customizing Indentation
5476 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5477 @section Line-Up Functions
5478 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5479
5480 @cindex line-up function
5481 @cindex indentation function
5482 Often there are cases when a simple offset setting on a syntactic
5483 symbol isn't enough to get the desired indentation---for example, you
5484 might want to line up a closing parenthesis with the matching opening
5485 one rather than indenting relative to its ``anchor point''. @ccmode{}
5486 provides this flexibility with @dfn{line-up functions}.
5487
5488 The way you associate a line-up function with a syntactic symbol is
5489 described in @ref{c-offsets-alist}. @ccmode{} comes with many
5490 predefined line-up functions for common situations. If none of these
5491 does what you want, you can write your own. @xref{Custom Line-Up}.
5492 Sometimes, it is easier to tweak the standard indentation by adding a
5493 function to @code{c-special-indent-hook} (@pxref{Other Indentation}).
5494
5495 The line-up functions haven't been adapted for AWK buffers or tested
5496 with them. Some of them might work serendipitously. There shouldn't be
5497 any problems writing custom line-up functions for AWK mode.
5498
5499 The calling convention for line-up functions is described fully in
5500 @ref{Custom Line-Up}. Roughly speaking, the return value is either an
5501 offset itself (such as @code{+} or @code{[0]}) or it's @code{nil},
5502 meaning ``this function is inappropriate in this case; try a
5503 different one''. @xref{c-offsets-alist}.
5504
5505 The subsections below describe all the standard line-up functions,
5506 categorized by the sort of token the lining-up centers around. For
5507 each of these functions there is a ``works with'' list that indicates
5508 which syntactic symbols the function is intended to be used with.
5509
5510 @macro workswith
5511 @emph{Works with:@ }
5512 @end macro
5513 @ifinfo
5514 @unmacro workswith
5515 @macro workswith
5516 Works with:
5517 @end macro
5518 @end ifinfo
5519
5520 @macro sssTBasicOffset
5521 <--> @i{c-basic-offset}@c
5522 @end macro
5523
5524 @macro sssTsssTBasicOffset
5525 <--><--> @i{c-basic-offset}@c
5526 @end macro
5527
5528 @macro hereFn{func}
5529 <- @i{\func\}@c
5530 @end macro
5531
5532 @c The TeX backend seems to insert extra spaces around the argument. :P
5533 @iftex
5534 @unmacro hereFn
5535 @macro hereFn{func}
5536 <-@i{\func\}@c
5537 @end macro
5538 @end iftex
5539
5540 @menu
5541 * Brace/Paren Line-Up::
5542 * List Line-Up::
5543 * Operator Line-Up::
5544 * Comment Line-Up::
5545 * Misc Line-Up::
5546 @end menu
5547
5548 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5549 @node Brace/Paren Line-Up, List Line-Up, Line-Up Functions, Line-Up Functions
5550 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5551 @subsection Brace and Parenthesis Line-Up Functions
5552 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5553
5554 The line-up functions here calculate the indentation for braces,
5555 parentheses and statements within brace blocks.
5556
5557 @defun c-lineup-close-paren
5558 @findex lineup-close-paren (c-)
5559 Line up the closing paren under its corresponding open paren if the
5560 open paren is followed by code. If the open paren ends its line, no
5561 indentation is added. E.g.:
5562
5563 @example
5564 @group
5565 main (int,
5566 char **
5567 ) @hereFn{c-lineup-close-paren}
5568 @end group
5569 @end example
5570
5571 @noindent
5572 and
5573
5574 @example
5575 @group
5576 main (
5577 int, char **
5578 ) @hereFn{c-lineup-close-paren}
5579 @end group
5580 @end example
5581
5582 As a special case, if a brace block is opened at the same line as the
5583 open parenthesis of the argument list, the indentation is
5584 @code{c-basic-offset} instead of the open paren column. See
5585 @code{c-lineup-arglist} for further discussion of this ``DWIM'' measure.
5586
5587 @workswith All @code{*-close} symbols.
5588 @end defun
5589
5590 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5591
5592 @anchor{c-lineup-arglist-close-under-paren}
5593 @defun c-lineup-arglist-close-under-paren
5594 @findex lineup-arglist-close-under-paren (c-)
5595 Set your @code{arglist-close} syntactic symbol to this line-up function
5596 so that parentheses that close argument lists will line up under the
5597 parenthesis that opened the argument list. It can also be used with
5598 @code{arglist-cont} and @code{arglist-cont-nonempty} to line up all
5599 lines inside a parenthesis under the open paren.
5600
5601 As a special case, if a brace block is opened at the same line as the
5602 open parenthesis of the argument list, the indentation is
5603 @code{c-basic-offset} only. See @code{c-lineup-arglist} for further
5604 discussion of this ``DWIM'' measure.
5605
5606 @workswith Almost all symbols, but are typically most useful on
5607 @code{arglist-close}, @code{brace-list-close}, @code{arglist-cont} and
5608 @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
5609 @end defun
5610
5611 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5612
5613 @defun c-indent-one-line-block
5614 @findex indent-one-line-block (c-)
5615 Indent a one line block @code{c-basic-offset} extra. E.g.:
5616
5617 @example
5618 @group
5619 if (n > 0)
5620 @{m+=n; n=0;@} @hereFn{c-indent-one-line-block}
5621 @sssTBasicOffset{}
5622 @end group
5623 @end example
5624
5625 @noindent
5626 and
5627
5628 @example
5629 @group
5630 if (n > 0)
5631 @{ @hereFn{c-indent-one-line-block}
5632 m+=n; n=0;
5633 @}
5634 @end group
5635 @end example
5636
5637 The block may be surrounded by any kind of parenthesis characters.
5638 @code{nil} is returned if the line doesn't start with a one line block,
5639 which makes the function usable in list expressions.
5640
5641 @workswith Almost all syntactic symbols, but most useful on the
5642 @code{-open} symbols.
5643 @end defun
5644
5645 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5646
5647 @defun c-indent-multi-line-block
5648 @findex indent-multi-line-block (c-)
5649 Indent a multiline block @code{c-basic-offset} extra. E.g.:
5650
5651 @example
5652 @group
5653 int *foo[] = @{
5654 NULL,
5655 @{17@}, @hereFn{c-indent-multi-line-block}
5656 @end group
5657 @end example
5658
5659 @noindent
5660 and
5661
5662 @example
5663 @group
5664 int *foo[] = @{
5665 NULL,
5666 @{ @hereFn{c-indent-multi-line-block}
5667 17
5668 @},
5669 @sssTBasicOffset{}
5670 @end group
5671 @end example
5672
5673 The block may be surrounded by any kind of parenthesis characters.
5674 @code{nil} is returned if the line doesn't start with a multiline
5675 block, which makes the function usable in list expressions.
5676
5677 @workswith Almost all syntactic symbols, but most useful on the
5678 @code{-open} symbols.
5679 @end defun
5680
5681 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5682
5683 @defun c-lineup-runin-statements
5684 @findex lineup-runin-statements (c-)
5685 Line up statements for coding standards which place the first statement
5686 in a block on the same line as the block opening brace@footnote{Run-in
5687 style doesn't really work too well. You might need to write your own
5688 custom line-up functions to better support this style.}. E.g.:
5689
5690 @example
5691 @group
5692 int main()
5693 @{ puts ("Hello!");
5694 return 0; @hereFn{c-lineup-runin-statements}
5695 @}
5696 @end group
5697 @end example
5698
5699 If there is no statement after the opening brace to align with,
5700 @code{nil} is returned. This makes the function usable in list
5701 expressions.
5702
5703 @workswith The @code{statement} syntactic symbol.
5704 @end defun
5705
5706 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5707
5708 @defun c-lineup-inexpr-block
5709 @findex lineup-inexpr-block (c-)
5710 This can be used with the in-expression block symbols to indent the
5711 whole block to the column where the construct is started. E.g., for Java
5712 anonymous classes, this lines up the class under the @samp{new} keyword,
5713 and in Pike it lines up the lambda function body under the @samp{lambda}
5714 keyword. Returns @code{nil} if the block isn't part of such a
5715 construct.
5716
5717 @workswith @code{inlambda}, @code{inexpr-statement},
5718 @code{inexpr-class}.
5719 @end defun
5720
5721 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5722
5723 @defun c-lineup-after-whitesmith-blocks
5724 @findex lineup-after-whitesmith-blocks (c-)
5725 Compensate for Whitesmith style indentation of blocks. Due to the way
5726 @ccmode{} calculates anchor positions for normal lines inside blocks,
5727 this function is necessary for those lines to get correct Whitesmith
5728 style indentation. Consider the following examples:
5729
5730 @example
5731 @group
5732 int foo()
5733 @{
5734 a;
5735 x; @hereFn{c-lineup-after-whitesmith-blocks}
5736 @end group
5737 @end example
5738
5739 @example
5740 @group
5741 int foo()
5742 @{
5743 @{
5744 a;
5745 @}
5746 x; @hereFn{c-lineup-after-whitesmith-blocks}
5747 @end group
5748 @end example
5749
5750 The fact that the line with @code{x} is preceded by a Whitesmith style
5751 indented block in the latter case and not the first should not affect
5752 its indentation. But since CC Mode in cases like this uses the
5753 indentation of the preceding statement as anchor position, the @code{x}
5754 would in the second case be indented too much if the offset for
5755 @code{statement} was set simply to zero.
5756
5757 This lineup function corrects for this situation by detecting if the
5758 anchor position is at an open paren character. In that case, it instead
5759 indents relative to the surrounding block just like
5760 @code{c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block}.
5761
5762 @workswith @code{brace-list-entry}, @code{brace-entry-open},
5763 @code{statement}, @code{arglist-cont}.
5764 @end defun
5765
5766 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5767
5768 @defun c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block
5769 @findex lineup-whitesmith-in-block (c-)
5770 Line up lines inside a block in Whitesmith style. It's done in a way
5771 that works both when the opening brace hangs and when it doesn't. E.g.:
5772
5773 @example
5774 @group
5775 something
5776 @{
5777 foo; @hereFn{c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block}
5778 @}
5779 @end group
5780 @end example
5781
5782 @noindent
5783 and
5784
5785 @example
5786 @group
5787 something @{
5788 foo; @hereFn{c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block}
5789 @}
5790 @sssTBasicOffset{}
5791 @end group
5792 @end example
5793
5794 In the first case the indentation is kept unchanged, in the second
5795 @code{c-basic-offset} is added.
5796
5797 @workswith @code{defun-close}, @code{defun-block-intro},
5798 @code{inline-close}, @code{block-close}, @code{brace-list-close},
5799 @code{brace-list-intro}, @code{statement-block-intro},
5800 @code{arglist-intro}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty},
5801 @code{arglist-close}, and all @code{in*} symbols, e.g., @code{inclass}
5802 and @code{inextern-lang}.
5803 @end defun
5804
5805 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5806 @node List Line-Up, Operator Line-Up, Brace/Paren Line-Up, Line-Up Functions
5807 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5808 @subsection List Line-Up Functions
5809 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5810
5811 The line-up functions here calculate the indentation for lines which
5812 form lists of items, usually separated by commas.
5813
5814 The function @ref{c-lineup-arglist-close-under-paren}, which is mainly
5815 for indenting a close parenthesis, is also useful for the lines
5816 contained within parentheses.
5817
5818 @defun c-lineup-arglist
5819 @findex lineup-arglist (c-)
5820 Line up the current argument line under the first argument.
5821
5822 As a special case, if an argument on the same line as the open
5823 parenthesis starts with a brace block opener, the indentation is
5824 @code{c-basic-offset} only. This is intended as a ``DWIM'' measure in
5825 cases like macros that contain statement blocks, e.g.:
5826
5827 @example
5828 @group
5829 A_VERY_LONG_MACRO_NAME (@{
5830 some (code, with + long, lines * in[it]);
5831 @});
5832 @sssTBasicOffset{}
5833 @end group
5834 @end example
5835
5836 This is motivated partly because it's more in line with how code
5837 blocks are handled, and partly since it approximates the behavior of
5838 earlier CC Mode versions, which due to inaccurate analysis tended to
5839 indent such cases this way.
5840
5841 @workswith @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}, @code{arglist-close}.
5842 @end defun
5843
5844 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5845
5846 @defun c-lineup-arglist-intro-after-paren
5847 @findex lineup-arglist-intro-after-paren (c-)
5848 Line up a line to just after the open paren of the surrounding paren or
5849 brace block.
5850
5851 @workswith @code{defun-block-intro}, @code{brace-list-intro},
5852 @code{statement-block-intro}, @code{statement-case-intro},
5853 @code{arglist-intro}.
5854 @end defun
5855
5856 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5857
5858 @defun c-lineup-multi-inher
5859 @findex lineup-multi-inher (c-)
5860 Line up the classes in C++ multiple inheritance clauses and member
5861 initializers under each other. E.g.:
5862
5863 @example
5864 @group
5865 Foo::Foo (int a, int b):
5866 Cyphr (a),
5867 Bar (b) @hereFn{c-lineup-multi-inher}
5868 @end group
5869 @end example
5870
5871 @noindent
5872 and
5873
5874 @example
5875 @group
5876 class Foo
5877 : public Cyphr,
5878 public Bar @hereFn{c-lineup-multi-inher}
5879 @end group
5880 @end example
5881
5882 @noindent
5883 and
5884
5885 @example
5886 @group
5887 Foo::Foo (int a, int b)
5888 : Cyphr (a)
5889 , Bar (b) @hereFn{c-lineup-multi-inher}
5890 @end group
5891 @end example
5892
5893 @workswith @code{inher-cont}, @code{member-init-cont}.
5894 @end defun
5895
5896 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5897
5898 @defun c-lineup-java-inher
5899 @findex lineup-java-inher (c-)
5900 Line up Java implements and extends declarations. If class names
5901 follow on the same line as the @samp{implements}/@samp{extends}
5902 keyword, they are lined up under each other. Otherwise, they are
5903 indented by adding @code{c-basic-offset} to the column of the keyword.
5904 E.g.:
5905
5906 @example
5907 @group
5908 class Foo
5909 extends
5910 Bar @hereFn{c-lineup-java-inher}
5911 @sssTBasicOffset{}
5912 @end group
5913 @end example
5914
5915 @noindent
5916 and
5917
5918 @example
5919 @group
5920 class Foo
5921 extends Cyphr,
5922 Bar @hereFn{c-lineup-java-inher}
5923 @end group
5924 @end example
5925
5926 @workswith @code{inher-cont}.
5927 @end defun
5928
5929 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5930
5931 @defun c-lineup-java-throws
5932 @findex lineup-java-throws (c-)
5933 Line up Java throws declarations. If exception names follow on the
5934 same line as the throws keyword, they are lined up under each other.
5935 Otherwise, they are indented by adding @code{c-basic-offset} to the
5936 column of the @samp{throws} keyword. The @samp{throws} keyword itself
5937 is also indented by @code{c-basic-offset} from the function declaration
5938 start if it doesn't hang. E.g.:
5939
5940 @example
5941 @group
5942 int foo()
5943 throws @hereFn{c-lineup-java-throws}
5944 Bar @hereFn{c-lineup-java-throws}
5945 @sssTsssTBasicOffset{}
5946 @end group
5947 @end example
5948
5949 @noindent
5950 and
5951
5952 @example
5953 @group
5954 int foo() throws Cyphr,
5955 Bar, @hereFn{c-lineup-java-throws}
5956 Vlod @hereFn{c-lineup-java-throws}
5957 @end group
5958 @end example
5959
5960 @workswith @code{func-decl-cont}.
5961 @end defun
5962
5963 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5964
5965 @defun c-lineup-template-args
5966 @findex lineup-template-args (c-)
5967 Line up the arguments of a template argument list under each other, but
5968 only in the case where the first argument is on the same line as the
5969 opening @samp{<}.
5970
5971 To allow this function to be used in a list expression, @code{nil} is
5972 returned if there's no template argument on the first line.
5973
5974 @workswith @code{template-args-cont}.
5975 @end defun
5976
5977 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5978
5979 @defun c-lineup-ObjC-method-call
5980 @findex lineup-ObjC-method-call (c-)
5981 For Objective-C code, line up selector args as Emacs Lisp mode does
5982 with function args: go to the position right after the message receiver,
5983 and if you are at the end of the line, indent the current line
5984 c-basic-offset columns from the opening bracket; otherwise you are
5985 looking at the first character of the first method call argument, so
5986 lineup the current line with it.
5987
5988 @workswith @code{objc-method-call-cont}.
5989 @end defun
5990
5991 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5992
5993 @defun c-lineup-ObjC-method-args
5994 @findex lineup-ObjC-method-args (c-)
5995 For Objective-C code, line up the colons that separate args. The colon
5996 on the current line is aligned with the one on the first line.
5997
5998 @workswith @code{objc-method-args-cont}.
5999 @end defun
6000
6001 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6002
6003 @defun c-lineup-ObjC-method-args-2
6004 @findex lineup-ObjC-method-args-2 (c-)
6005 Similar to @code{c-lineup-ObjC-method-args} but lines up the colon on
6006 the current line with the colon on the previous line.
6007
6008 @workswith @code{objc-method-args-cont}.
6009 @end defun
6010
6011 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6012 @node Operator Line-Up, Comment Line-Up, List Line-Up, Line-Up Functions
6013 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6014 @subsection Operator Line-Up Functions
6015 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6016
6017 The line-up functions here calculate the indentation for lines which
6018 start with an operator, by lining it up with something on the previous
6019 line.
6020
6021 @defun c-lineup-argcont
6022 @findex lineup-argcont (c-)
6023 Line up a continued argument. E.g.:
6024
6025 @example
6026 @group
6027 foo (xyz, aaa + bbb + ccc
6028 + ddd + eee + fff); @hereFn{c-lineup-argcont}
6029 @end group
6030 @end example
6031
6032 Only continuation lines like this are touched, @code{nil} is returned on
6033 lines which are the start of an argument.
6034
6035 Within a gcc @code{asm} block, @code{:} is recognized as an argument
6036 separator, but of course only between operand specifications, not in the
6037 expressions for the operands.
6038
6039 @workswith @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
6040 @end defun
6041
6042 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6043
6044 @defun c-lineup-arglist-operators
6045 @findex lineup-arglist-operators (c-)
6046 Line up lines starting with an infix operator under the open paren.
6047 Return @code{nil} on lines that don't start with an operator, to leave
6048 those cases to other line-up functions. Example:
6049
6050 @example
6051 @group
6052 if ( x < 10
6053 || at_limit (x, @hereFn{c-lineup-arglist-operators}
6054 list) @hereFn{c-lineup-arglist-operators@r{ returns nil}}
6055 )
6056 @end group
6057 @end example
6058
6059 Since this function doesn't do anything for lines without an infix
6060 operator you typically want to use it together with some other lineup
6061 settings, e.g., as follows (the @code{arglist-close} setting is just a
6062 suggestion to get a consistent style):
6063
6064 @example
6065 (c-set-offset 'arglist-cont
6066 '(c-lineup-arglist-operators 0))
6067 (c-set-offset 'arglist-cont-nonempty
6068 '(c-lineup-arglist-operators c-lineup-arglist))
6069 (c-set-offset 'arglist-close
6070 '(c-lineup-arglist-close-under-paren))
6071 @end example
6072
6073 @workswith @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
6074 @end defun
6075
6076 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6077
6078 @defun c-lineup-assignments
6079 @findex lineup-assignments (c-)
6080 Line up the current line after the assignment operator on the first line
6081 in the statement. If there isn't any, return @code{nil} to allow stacking with
6082 other line-up functions. If the current line contains an assignment
6083 operator too, try to align it with the first one.
6084
6085 @workswith @code{topmost-intro-cont}, @code{statement-cont},
6086 @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
6087
6088 @end defun
6089
6090 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6091
6092 @defun c-lineup-math
6093 @findex lineup-math (c-)
6094 Like @code{c-lineup-assignments} but indent with @code{c-basic-offset}
6095 if no assignment operator was found on the first line. I.e., this
6096 function is the same as specifying a list @code{(c-lineup-assignments
6097 +)}. It's provided for compatibility with old configurations.
6098
6099 @workswith @code{topmost-intro-cont}, @code{statement-cont},
6100 @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
6101 @end defun
6102
6103 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6104
6105 @defun c-lineup-cascaded-calls
6106 @findex lineup-cascaded-calls (c-)
6107 Line up ``cascaded calls'' under each other. If the line begins with
6108 @code{->} or @code{.} and the preceding line ends with one or more
6109 function calls preceded by the same token, then the arrow is lined up
6110 with the first of those tokens. E.g.:
6111
6112 @example
6113 @group
6114 r = proc->add(17)->add(18)
6115 ->add(19) + @hereFn{c-lineup-cascaded-calls}
6116 offset; @hereFn{c-lineup-cascaded-calls@r{ (inactive)}}
6117 @end group
6118 @end example
6119
6120 In any other situation @code{nil} is returned to allow use in list
6121 expressions.
6122
6123 @workswith @code{topmost-intro-cont}, @code{statement-cont},
6124 @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
6125 @end defun
6126
6127 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6128
6129 @defun c-lineup-streamop
6130 @findex lineup-streamop (c-)
6131 Line up C++ stream operators (i.e., @samp{<<} and @samp{>>}).
6132
6133 @workswith @code{stream-op}.
6134 @end defun
6135
6136 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6137
6138 @defun c-lineup-string-cont
6139 @findex lineup-string-cont (c-)
6140 Line up a continued string under the one it continues. A continued
6141 string in this sense is where a string literal follows directly after
6142 another one. E.g.:
6143
6144 @example
6145 @group
6146 result = prefix + "A message "
6147 "string."; @hereFn{c-lineup-string-cont}
6148 @end group
6149 @end example
6150
6151 @code{nil} is returned in other situations, to allow stacking with other
6152 lineup functions.
6153
6154 @workswith @code{topmost-intro-cont}, @code{statement-cont},
6155 @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
6156 @end defun
6157
6158
6159 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6160 @node Comment Line-Up, Misc Line-Up, Operator Line-Up, Line-Up Functions
6161 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6162 @subsection Comment Line-Up Functions
6163 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6164
6165 The lineup functions here calculate the indentation for several types
6166 of comment structure.
6167
6168 @defun c-lineup-C-comments
6169 @findex lineup-C-comments (c-)
6170 Line up C block comment continuation lines. Various heuristics are used
6171 to handle most of the common comment styles. Some examples:
6172
6173 @example
6174 @group
6175 /* /** /*
6176 * text * text text
6177 */ */ */
6178 @end group
6179 @end example
6180
6181 @example
6182 @group
6183 /* text /* /**
6184 text ** text ** text
6185 */ */ */
6186 @end group
6187 @end example
6188
6189 @example
6190 @group
6191 /**************************************************
6192 * text
6193 *************************************************/
6194 @end group
6195 @end example
6196
6197 @vindex comment-start-skip
6198 @example
6199 @group
6200 /**************************************************
6201 Free form text comments:
6202 In comments with a long delimiter line at the
6203 start, the indentation is kept unchanged for lines
6204 that start with an empty comment line prefix. The
6205 delimiter line is whatever matches the
6206 @code{comment-start-skip} regexp.
6207 **************************************************/
6208 @end group
6209 @end example
6210
6211 The style variable @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp} is used to recognize
6212 the comment line prefix, e.g., the @samp{*} that usually starts every
6213 line inside a comment.
6214
6215 @workswith The @code{c} syntactic symbol.
6216 @end defun
6217
6218 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6219
6220 @defun c-lineup-comment
6221 @findex lineup-comment (c-)
6222 Line up a comment-only line according to the style variable
6223 @code{c-comment-only-line-offset}. If the comment is lined up with a
6224 comment starter on the previous line, that alignment is preserved.
6225
6226 @defopt c-comment-only-line-offset
6227 @vindex comment-only-line-offset (c-)
6228 This style variable specifies the extra offset for the line. It can
6229 contain an integer or a cons cell of the form
6230
6231 @example
6232 (@r{@var{non-anchored-offset}} . @r{@var{anchored-offset}})
6233 @end example
6234
6235 @noindent
6236 where @var{non-anchored-offset} is the amount of offset given to
6237 non-column-zero anchored lines, and @var{anchored-offset} is the amount
6238 of offset to give column-zero anchored lines. Just an integer as value
6239 is equivalent to @code{(@r{@var{value}} . -1000)}.
6240 @end defopt
6241
6242 @workswith @code{comment-intro}.
6243 @end defun
6244
6245 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6246
6247 @defun c-lineup-knr-region-comment
6248 @findex lineup-knr-region-comment (c-)
6249 Line up a comment in the ``K&R region'' with the declaration. That is
6250 the region between the function or class header and the beginning of the
6251 block. E.g.:
6252
6253 @example
6254 @group
6255 int main()
6256 /* Called at startup. */ @hereFn{c-lineup-knr-region-comment}
6257 @{
6258 return 0;
6259 @}
6260 @end group
6261 @end example
6262
6263 Return @code{nil} if called in any other situation, to be useful in list
6264 expressions.
6265
6266 @workswith @code{comment-intro}.
6267 @end defun
6268
6269 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6270 @node Misc Line-Up, , Comment Line-Up, Line-Up Functions
6271 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6272 @subsection Miscellaneous Line-Up Functions
6273 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6274
6275 The line-up functions here are the odds and ends which didn't fit into
6276 any earlier category.
6277
6278 @defun c-lineup-dont-change
6279 @findex lineup-dont-change (c-)
6280 This lineup function makes the line stay at whatever indentation it
6281 already has; think of it as an identity function for lineups.
6282
6283 @workswith Any syntactic symbol.
6284 @end defun
6285
6286 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6287
6288 @defun c-lineup-cpp-define
6289 @findex lineup-cpp-define (c-)
6290 Line up macro continuation lines according to the indentation of the
6291 construct preceding the macro. E.g.:
6292
6293 @example
6294 @group
6295 const char msg[] = @hereFn{@r{The beginning of the preceding construct.}}
6296 \"Some text.\";
6297
6298 #define X(A, B) \
6299 do @{ \ @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define}
6300 printf (A, B); \
6301 @} while (0)
6302 @end group
6303 @end example
6304
6305 @noindent
6306 and:
6307
6308 @example
6309 @group
6310 int dribble() @{
6311 if (!running) @hereFn{@r{The beginning of the preceding construct.}}
6312 error(\"Not running!\");
6313
6314 #define X(A, B) \
6315 do @{ \ @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define}
6316 printf (A, B); \
6317 @} while (0)
6318 @end group
6319 @end example
6320
6321 If @code{c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros} is non-@code{nil}, the
6322 function returns the relative indentation to the macro start line to
6323 allow accumulation with other offsets. E.g., in the following cases,
6324 @code{cpp-define-intro} is combined with the
6325 @code{statement-block-intro} that comes from the @samp{do @{} that hangs
6326 on the @samp{#define} line:
6327
6328 @example
6329 @group
6330 const char msg[] =
6331 \"Some text.\";
6332
6333 #define X(A, B) do @{ \
6334 printf (A, B); \ @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define}
6335 this->refs++; \
6336 @} while (0) @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define}
6337 @end group
6338 @end example
6339
6340 @noindent
6341 and:
6342
6343 @example
6344 @group
6345 int dribble() @{
6346 if (!running)
6347 error(\"Not running!\");
6348
6349 #define X(A, B) do @{ \
6350 printf (A, B); \ @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define}
6351 this->refs++; \
6352 @} while (0) @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define}
6353 @end group
6354 @end example
6355
6356 The relative indentation returned by @code{c-lineup-cpp-define} is zero
6357 and two, respectively, on the two lines in each of these examples. They
6358 are then added to the two column indentation that
6359 @code{statement-block-intro} gives in both cases here.
6360
6361 If the relative indentation is zero, then @code{nil} is returned
6362 instead. That is useful in a list expression to specify the default
6363 indentation on the top level.
6364
6365 If @code{c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros} is @code{nil} then this
6366 function keeps the current indentation, except for empty lines (ignoring
6367 the ending backslash) where it takes the indentation from the closest
6368 preceding nonempty line in the macro. If there's no such line in the
6369 macro then the indentation is taken from the construct preceding it, as
6370 described above.
6371
6372 @workswith @code{cpp-define-intro}.
6373 @end defun
6374
6375 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6376
6377 @defun c-lineup-gcc-asm-reg
6378 @findex lineup-gcc-asm-reg (c-)
6379 Line up a gcc asm register under one on a previous line.
6380
6381 @example
6382 @group
6383 asm ("foo %1, %0\n"
6384 "bar %0, %1"
6385 : "=r" (w),
6386 "=r" (x)
6387 : "0" (y),
6388 "1" (z));
6389 @end group
6390 @end example
6391
6392 The @samp{x} line is aligned to the text after the @samp{:} on the
6393 @samp{w} line, and similarly @samp{z} under @samp{y}.
6394
6395 This is done only in an @samp{asm} or @samp{__asm__} block, and only to
6396 those lines mentioned. Anywhere else @code{nil} is returned. The usual
6397 arrangement is to have this routine as an extra feature at the start of
6398 arglist lineups, e.g.:
6399
6400 @example
6401 (c-lineup-gcc-asm-reg c-lineup-arglist)
6402 @end example
6403
6404 @workswith @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
6405 @end defun
6406
6407 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6408
6409 @defun c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont
6410 @findex lineup-topmost-intro-cont (c-)
6411 Line up declaration continuation lines zero or one indentation
6412 step@footnote{This function is mainly provided to mimic the behavior of
6413 CC Mode 5.28 and earlier where this case wasn't handled consistently so
6414 that those lines could be analyzed as either topmost-intro-cont or
6415 statement-cont. It's used for @code{topmost-intro-cont} by default, but
6416 you might consider using @code{+} instead.}. For lines preceding a
6417 definition, zero is used. For other lines, @code{c-basic-offset} is
6418 added to the indentation. E.g.:
6419
6420 @example
6421 @group
6422 int
6423 neg (int i) @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont}
6424 @{
6425 return -i;
6426 @}
6427 @end group
6428 @end example
6429
6430 @noindent
6431 and
6432
6433 @example
6434 @group
6435 struct
6436 larch @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont}
6437 @{
6438 double height;
6439 @}
6440 the_larch, @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont}
6441 another_larch; @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont}
6442 @sssTBasicOffset{}
6443 @end group
6444 @end example
6445
6446 @noindent
6447 and
6448
6449 @example
6450 @group
6451 struct larch
6452 the_larch, @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont}
6453 another_larch; @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont}
6454 @end group
6455 @end example
6456
6457 @workswith @code{topmost-intro-cont}.
6458 @end defun
6459
6460 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6461 @node Custom Line-Up, Other Indentation, Line-Up Functions, Customizing Indentation
6462 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6463 @section Custom Line-Up Functions
6464 @cindex customization, indentation functions
6465 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6466
6467 The most flexible way to customize indentation is by writing custom
6468 line-up functions, and associating them with specific syntactic
6469 symbols (@pxref{c-offsets-alist}). Depending on the effect you want,
6470 it might be better to write a @code{c-special-indent-hook} function
6471 rather than a line-up function (@pxref{Other Indentation}).
6472
6473 @ccmode{} comes with an extensive set of predefined line-up functions,
6474 not all of which are used by the default styles. So there's a good
6475 chance the function you want already exists. @xref{Line-Up
6476 Functions}, for a list of them. If you write your own line-up
6477 function, it's probably a good idea to start working from one of these
6478 predefined functions, which can be found in the file
6479 @file{cc-align.el}. If you have written a line-up function that you
6480 think is generally useful, you're very welcome to contribute it;
6481 please contact @email{bug-cc-mode@@gnu.org}.
6482
6483 Line-up functions are passed a single argument, the syntactic
6484 element (see below). At the time of the call, point will be somewhere
6485 on the line being indented. The return value is a
6486 @code{c-offsets-alist} offset specification: for example, an integer,
6487 a symbol such as @code{+}, a vector, @code{nil}@footnote{Returning
6488 @code{nil} is useful when the offset specification for a syntactic
6489 element is a list containing the line-up function
6490 (@pxref{c-offsets-alist}).}, or even another line-up function. Full
6491 details of these are in @ref{c-offsets-alist}.
6492
6493 Line-up functions must not move point or change the content of the
6494 buffer (except temporarily). They are however allowed to do
6495 @dfn{hidden buffer changes}, i.e., setting text properties for caching
6496 purposes etc. Buffer undo recording is disabled while they run.
6497
6498 The syntactic element passed as the parameter to a line-up function is
6499 a cons cell of the form
6500
6501 @example
6502 (@r{@var{syntactic-symbol}} . @r{@var{anchor-position}})
6503 @end example
6504
6505 @noindent
6506 @c FIXME!!! The following sentence might be better omitted, since the
6507 @c information is in the cross reference "Syntactic Analysis". 2005/10/2.
6508 where @var{syntactic-symbol} is the symbol that the function was
6509 called for, and @var{anchor-position} is the anchor position (if any)
6510 for the construct that triggered the syntactic symbol
6511 (@pxref{Syntactic Analysis}). This cons cell is how the syntactic
6512 element of a line used to be represented in @ccmode{} 5.28 and
6513 earlier. Line-up functions are still passed this cons cell, so as to
6514 preserve compatibility with older configurations. In the future, we
6515 may decide to convert to using the full list format---you can prepare
6516 your setup for this by using the access functions
6517 (@code{c-langelem-sym}, etc.)@: described below.
6518
6519 @vindex c-syntactic-element
6520 @vindex syntactic-element (c-)
6521 @vindex c-syntactic-context
6522 @vindex syntactic-context (c-)
6523 Some syntactic symbols, e.g., @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}, have more
6524 info in the syntactic element: typically other positions that can be
6525 interesting besides the anchor position. That info can't be accessed
6526 through the passed argument, which is a cons cell. Instead, you can
6527 get this information from the variable @code{c-syntactic-element},
6528 which is dynamically bound to the complete syntactic element. The
6529 variable @code{c-syntactic-context} might also be useful: it gets
6530 dynamically bound to the complete syntactic context. @xref{Custom
6531 Braces}.
6532
6533 @ccmode{} provides a few functions to access parts of syntactic
6534 elements in a more abstract way. Besides making the code easier to
6535 read, they also hide the difference between the old cons cell form
6536 used in the line-up function argument and the new list form used in
6537 @code{c-syntactic-element} and everywhere else. The functions are:
6538
6539 @defun c-langelem-sym langelem
6540 @findex langelem-sym (c-)
6541 Return the syntactic symbol in @var{langelem}.
6542 @end defun
6543
6544 @defun c-langelem-pos langelem
6545 @findex langelem-pos (c-)
6546 Return the anchor position in @var{langelem}, or @code{nil} if there is none.
6547 @end defun
6548
6549 @defun c-langelem-col langelem &optional preserve-point
6550 @findex langelem-col (c-)
6551 Return the column of the anchor position in @var{langelem}. Also move
6552 the point to that position unless @var{preserve-point} is
6553 non-@code{nil}.
6554 @end defun
6555
6556 @defun c-langelem-2nd-pos langelem
6557 @findex langelem-2nd-pos (c-)
6558 Return the secondary position in @var{langelem}, or @code{nil} if there
6559 is none.
6560
6561 Note that the return value of this function is always @code{nil} if
6562 @var{langelem} is in the old cons cell form. Thus this function is
6563 only meaningful when used on syntactic elements taken from
6564 @code{c-syntactic-element} or @code{c-syntactic-context}.
6565 @end defun
6566
6567 Sometimes you may need to use the syntactic context of a line other
6568 than the one being indented. You can determine this by (temporarily)
6569 moving point onto this line and calling @code{c-guess-basic-syntax}
6570 (@pxref{Syntactic Analysis}).
6571
6572 Custom line-up functions can be as simple or as complex as you like, and
6573 any syntactic symbol that appears in @code{c-offsets-alist} can have a
6574 custom line-up function associated with it.
6575
6576 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6577 @node Other Indentation, , Custom Line-Up, Customizing Indentation
6578 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6579 @section Other Special Indentations
6580 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6581
6582 To configure macros which you invoke without a terminating @samp{;},
6583 see @xref{Macros with ;}.
6584
6585 Here are the remaining odds and ends regarding indentation:
6586
6587 @defopt c-label-minimum-indentation
6588 @vindex label-minimum-indentation (c-)
6589 In @samp{gnu} style (@pxref{Built-in Styles}), a minimum indentation is
6590 imposed on lines inside code blocks. This minimum indentation is
6591 controlled by this style variable. The default value is 1.
6592
6593 @findex c-gnu-impose-minimum
6594 @findex gnu-impose-minimum (c-)
6595 It's the function @code{c-gnu-impose-minimum} that enforces this minimum
6596 indentation. It must be present on @code{c-special-indent-hook} to
6597 work.
6598 @end defopt
6599
6600 @defopt c-special-indent-hook
6601 @vindex special-indent-hook (c-)
6602 This style variable is a standard hook variable that is called after
6603 every line is indented by @ccmode{}. It is called only if
6604 @code{c-syntactic-indentation} is non-@code{nil} (which it is by
6605 default (@pxref{Indentation Engine Basics})). You can put a function
6606 on this hook to do any special indentation or ad hoc line adjustments
6607 your style dictates, such as adding extra indentation to constructors
6608 or destructor declarations in a class definition, etc. Sometimes it
6609 is better to write a custom Line-up Function instead (@pxref{Custom
6610 Line-Up}).
6611
6612 When the indentation engine calls this hook, the variable
6613 @code{c-syntactic-context} is bound to the current syntactic context
6614 (i.e., what you would get by typing @kbd{C-c C-s} on the source line.
6615 @xref{Custom Braces}.). Note that you should not change point or mark
6616 inside a @code{c-special-indent-hook} function, i.e., you'll probably
6617 want to wrap your function in a @code{save-excursion}@footnote{The
6618 numerical value returned by @code{point} will change if you change the
6619 indentation of the line within a @code{save-excursion} form, but point
6620 itself will still be over the same piece of text.}.
6621
6622 Setting @code{c-special-indent-hook} in style definitions is handled
6623 slightly differently from other variables---A style can only add
6624 functions to this hook, not remove them. @xref{Style Variables}.
6625 @end defopt
6626
6627
6628 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6629 @node Custom Macros, Odds and Ends, Customizing Indentation, Top
6630 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6631 @chapter Customizing Macros
6632 @cindex macros
6633 @cindex preprocessor directives
6634 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6635
6636 Preprocessor macros in C, C++, and Objective C (introduced by
6637 @code{#define}) have a syntax different from the main language---for
6638 example, a macro declaration is not terminated by a semicolon, and if
6639 it is more than a line long, line breaks in it must be escaped with
6640 backslashes. @ccmode{} has some commands to manipulate these, see
6641 @ref{Macro Backslashes}.
6642
6643 Normally, the lines in a multi-line macro are indented relative to
6644 each other as though they were code. You can suppress this behavior
6645 by setting the following user option:
6646
6647 @defopt c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros
6648 @vindex syntactic-indentation-in-macros (c-)
6649 Enable syntactic analysis inside macros, which is the default. If this
6650 is @code{nil}, all lines inside macro definitions are analyzed as
6651 @code{cpp-macro-cont}.
6652 @end defopt
6653
6654 Because a macro can expand into anything at all, near where one is
6655 invoked @ccmode{} can only indent and fontify code heuristically.
6656 Sometimes it gets it wrong. Usually you should try to design your
6657 macros so that they ''look like ordinary code'' when you invoke them.
6658 However, two situations are so common that @ccmode{} handles them
6659 specially: that is when certain macros needn't (or mustn't) be
6660 followed by a @samp{;}, and when certain macros (or compiler
6661 directives) expand to nothing. You need to configure @ccmode{} to
6662 handle these macros properly, see @ref{Macros with ;} and @ref{Noise
6663 Macros}.
6664
6665 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6666 @menu
6667 * Macro Backslashes::
6668 * Macros with ;::
6669 * Noise Macros::
6670 @end menu
6671
6672 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6673 @node Macro Backslashes, Macros with ;, Custom Macros, Custom Macros
6674 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6675 @section Customizing Macro Backslashes
6676 @cindex @code{#define}
6677 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6678
6679 @ccmode{} provides some tools to help keep the line continuation
6680 backslashes in macros neat and tidy. Their precise action is
6681 customized with these variables:
6682
6683 @defopt c-backslash-column
6684 @vindex backslash-column (c-)
6685 @defoptx c-backslash-max-column
6686 @vindex backslash-max-column (c-)
6687 These variables control the alignment columns for line continuation
6688 backslashes in multiline macros. They are used by the functions that
6689 automatically insert or align such backslashes,
6690 e.g., @code{c-backslash-region} and @code{c-context-line-break}.
6691
6692 @code{c-backslash-column} specifies the minimum column for the
6693 backslashes. If any line in the macro goes past this column, then the
6694 next tab stop (i.e., next multiple of @code{tab-width}) in that line is
6695 used as the alignment column for all the backslashes, so that they
6696 remain in a single column. However, if any lines go past
6697 @code{c-backslash-max-column} then the backslashes in the rest of the
6698 macro will be kept at that column, so that the lines which are too
6699 long ``stick out'' instead.
6700
6701 Don't ever set these variables to @code{nil}. If you want to disable
6702 the automatic alignment of backslashes, use
6703 @code{c-auto-align-backslashes}.
6704 @end defopt
6705
6706 @defopt c-auto-align-backslashes
6707 @vindex auto-align-backslashes (c-)
6708 Align automatically inserted line continuation backslashes if
6709 non-@code{nil}. When line continuation backslashes are inserted
6710 automatically for line breaks in multiline macros, e.g., by
6711 @code{c-context-line-break}, they are aligned with the other
6712 backslashes in the same macro if this flag is set.
6713
6714 If @code{c-auto-align-backslashes} is @code{nil}, automatically
6715 inserted backslashes are preceded by a single space, and backslashes
6716 get aligned only when you explicitly invoke the command
6717 @code{c-backslash-region} (@kbd{C-c C-\}).
6718 @end defopt
6719
6720 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6721 @node Macros with ;, Noise Macros, Macro Backslashes, Custom Macros
6722 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6723 @section Macros with semicolons
6724 @cindex macros with semicolons
6725 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6726 Macros which needn't (or mustn't) be followed by a semicolon when you
6727 invoke them, @dfn{macros with semicolons}, are very common. These can
6728 cause @ccmode{} to parse the next line wrongly as a
6729 @code{statement-cont} (@pxref{Function Symbols}) and thus mis-indent
6730 it.
6731
6732 You can prevent this by specifying which macros have semicolons. It
6733 doesn't matter whether or not such a macro has a parameter list:
6734
6735 @defopt c-macro-names-with-semicolon
6736 @vindex macro-names-with-semicolon (c-)
6737 This buffer-local variable specifies which macros have semicolons.
6738 After setting its value, you need to call
6739 @code{c-make-macro-with-semi-re} for it to take effect. It should be
6740 set to one of these values:
6741
6742 @table @asis
6743 @item nil
6744 There are no macros with semicolons.
6745 @item a list of strings
6746 Each string is the name of a macro with a semicolon. Only valid
6747 @code{#define} names are allowed here. For example, to set the
6748 default value, you could write the following into your @file{.emacs}:
6749
6750 @example
6751 (setq c-macro-names-with-semicolon
6752 '("Q_OBJECT" "Q_PROPERTY" "Q_DECLARE" "Q_ENUMS"))
6753 @end example
6754
6755 @item a regular expression
6756 This matches each symbol which is a macro with a semicolon. It must
6757 not match any string which isn't a valid @code{#define} name. For
6758 example:
6759
6760 @example
6761 (setq c-macro-names-with-semicolon
6762 "\\<\\(CLEAN_UP_AND_RETURN\\|Q_[[:upper:]]+\\)\\>")
6763 @end example
6764 @end table
6765 @end defopt
6766
6767 @defun c-make-macro-with-semi-re
6768 @findex make-macro-with-semi-re (c-)
6769 Call this (non-interactive) function, which sets internal variables,
6770 each time you change the value of @code{c-macro-names-with-semicolon}
6771 after the major mode function has run. It takes no arguments, and its
6772 return value has no meaning. This function is called by @ccmode{}'s
6773 initialization code, after the mode hooks have run.
6774 @end defun
6775
6776 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6777 @node Noise Macros, , Macros with ;, Custom Macros
6778 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6779 @section Noise Macros
6780 @cindex noise macros
6781 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6782
6783 In @ccmode{}, @dfn{noise macros} are macros which expand to nothing,
6784 or compiler directives (such as GCC's @code{__attribute__}) which play
6785 no part in the syntax of the C (etc.) language. Some noise macros are
6786 followed by arguments in parentheses (possibly optionally), others
6787 are not.
6788
6789 Noise macros can easily confuse @ccmode{}'s analysis of function
6790 headers, causing them to be mis-fontified, or even mis-indented. You
6791 can prevent this confusion by specifying the identifiers which
6792 constitute noise macros.
6793
6794 @defopt c-noise-macro-names
6795 @vindex noise-macro-names (c-)
6796 This variable is a list of names of noise macros which never have
6797 parenthesized arguments. Each element is a string, and must be a
6798 valid identifier. An element in @code{c-noise-macro-names} must not
6799 also be in @code{c-noise-macro-with-parens-names}. Such an element is
6800 treated as whitespace by @ccmode{}.
6801 @end defopt
6802
6803 @defopt c-noise-macro-with-parens-names
6804 @vindex noise-macro-with-parens-names (c-)
6805 This variable is a list of names of noise macros which optionally have
6806 arguments in parentheses. Each element of the list is a string, and
6807 must be a valid identifier. An element in
6808 @code{c-noise-macro-with-parens-names} must not also be in
6809 @code{c-noise-macro-names}. For performance reasons, such an element,
6810 together with the optional parenthesized arguments, is specially
6811 handled, but it is only handled when used in declaration
6812 contexts@footnote{If this restriction causes your project
6813 difficulties, please get in touch with @email{bug-cc-mode@@gnu.org}.}.
6814
6815 The two compiler directives @code{__attribute__} and @code{__declspec}
6816 have traditionally been handled specially in @ccmode{}; for example
6817 they are fontified with font-lock-keyword-face. You don't need to
6818 include these directives in @code{c-noise-macro-with-parens-names},
6819 but doing so is OK.
6820 @end defopt
6821
6822 @defun c-make-noise-macro-regexps
6823 @findex make-noise-macro-regexps (c-)
6824 Call this (non-interactive) function, which sets internal variables,
6825 on changing the value of @code{c-noise-macro-names} or
6826 @code{c-noise-macro-with-parens-names} after the major mode's function
6827 has run. This function is called by @ccmode{}'s initialization code,
6828 after the mode hooks have run.
6829 @end defun
6830
6831 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6832 @node Odds and Ends, Sample Init File, Custom Macros, Top
6833 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6834 @chapter Odds and Ends
6835 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6836
6837 The stuff that didn't fit in anywhere else is documented here.
6838
6839 @defopt c-require-final-newline
6840 @vindex require-final-newline (c-)
6841 Controls whether a final newline is enforced when the file is saved.
6842 The value is an association list that for each language mode specifies
6843 the value to give to @code{require-final-newline} (@pxref{Saving
6844 Buffers,,,@lispref{}, @lispreftitle{}}) at mode initialization. If a
6845 language isn't present on the association list, CC Mode won't touch
6846 @code{require-final-newline} in buffers for that language.
6847
6848 The default is to set @code{require-final-newline} to @code{t} in the
6849 languages that mandate that source files should end with newlines.
6850 These are C, C++ and Objective-C.
6851 @end defopt
6852
6853 @defopt c-echo-syntactic-information-p
6854 @vindex echo-syntactic-information-p (c-)
6855 If non-@code{nil}, the syntactic analysis for the current line is shown
6856 in the echo area when it's indented (unless
6857 @code{c-syntactic-indentation} is @code{nil}). That's useful when
6858 finding out which syntactic symbols to modify to get the indentation you
6859 want.
6860 @end defopt
6861
6862 @defopt c-report-syntactic-errors
6863 @vindex report-syntactic-errors (c-)
6864 If non-@code{nil}, certain syntactic errors are reported with a ding and
6865 a message, for example when an @code{else} is indented for which there
6866 is no corresponding @code{if}.
6867
6868 Note however that @ccmode{} doesn't make any special effort to check for
6869 syntactic errors; that's the job of the compiler. The reason it can
6870 report cases like the one above is that it can't find the correct
6871 anchoring position to indent the line in that case.
6872 @end defopt
6873
6874
6875 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6876 @node Sample Init File, Performance Issues, Odds and Ends, Top
6877 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6878 @appendix Sample Init File
6879 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6880
6881 Here's a sample .emacs file fragment that might help you along the way.
6882 Just copy this region and paste it into your .emacs file. You might want
6883 to change some of the actual values.
6884
6885 @verbatim
6886 ;; Make a non-standard key binding. We can put this in
6887 ;; c-mode-base-map because c-mode-map, c++-mode-map, and so on,
6888 ;; inherit from it.
6889 (defun my-c-initialization-hook ()
6890 (define-key c-mode-base-map "\C-m" 'c-context-line-break))
6891 (add-hook 'c-initialization-hook 'my-c-initialization-hook)
6892
6893 ;; offset customizations not in my-c-style
6894 ;; This will take precedence over any setting of the syntactic symbol
6895 ;; made by a style.
6896 (setq c-offsets-alist '((member-init-intro . ++)))
6897
6898 ;; Create my personal style.
6899 (defconst my-c-style
6900 '((c-tab-always-indent . t)
6901 (c-comment-only-line-offset . 4)
6902 (c-hanging-braces-alist . ((substatement-open after)
6903 (brace-list-open)))
6904 (c-hanging-colons-alist . ((member-init-intro before)
6905 (inher-intro)
6906 (case-label after)
6907 (label after)
6908 (access-label after)))
6909 (c-cleanup-list . (scope-operator
6910 empty-defun-braces
6911 defun-close-semi))
6912 (c-offsets-alist . ((arglist-close . c-lineup-arglist)
6913 (substatement-open . 0)
6914 (case-label . 4)
6915 (block-open . 0)
6916 (knr-argdecl-intro . -)))
6917 (c-echo-syntactic-information-p . t))
6918 "My C Programming Style")
6919 (c-add-style "PERSONAL" my-c-style)
6920
6921 ;; Customizations for all modes in CC Mode.
6922 (defun my-c-mode-common-hook ()
6923 ;; set my personal style for the current buffer
6924 (c-set-style "PERSONAL")
6925 ;; other customizations
6926 (setq tab-width 8
6927 ;; this will make sure spaces are used instead of tabs
6928 indent-tabs-mode nil)
6929 ;; we like auto-newline, but not hungry-delete
6930 (c-toggle-auto-newline 1))
6931 (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook 'my-c-mode-common-hook)
6932 @end verbatim
6933
6934 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6935 @node Performance Issues, Limitations and Known Bugs, Sample Init File, Top
6936 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6937 @appendix Performance Issues
6938 @cindex performance
6939 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6940
6941 @comment FIXME: (ACM, 2003/5/24). Check whether AWK needs mentioning here.
6942
6943 C and its derivative languages are highly complex creatures. Often,
6944 ambiguous code situations arise that require @ccmode{} to scan large
6945 portions of the buffer to determine syntactic context. Such
6946 pathological code can cause @ccmode{} to perform fairly badly. This
6947 section gives some insight in how @ccmode{} operates, how that interacts
6948 with some coding styles, and what you can use to improve performance.
6949
6950 The overall goal is that @ccmode{} shouldn't be overly slow (i.e., take
6951 more than a fraction of a second) in any interactive operation.
6952 I.e., it's tuned to limit the maximum response time in single operations,
6953 which is sometimes at the expense of batch-like operations like
6954 reindenting whole blocks. If you find that @ccmode{} gradually gets
6955 slower and slower in certain situations, perhaps as the file grows in
6956 size or as the macro or comment you're editing gets bigger, then chances
6957 are that something isn't working right. You should consider reporting
6958 it, unless it's something that's mentioned in this section.
6959
6960 Because @ccmode{} has to scan the buffer backwards from the current
6961 insertion point, and because C's syntax is fairly difficult to parse in
6962 the backwards direction, @ccmode{} often tries to find the nearest
6963 position higher up in the buffer from which to begin a forward scan
6964 (it's typically an opening or closing parenthesis of some kind). The
6965 farther this position is from the current insertion point, the slower it
6966 gets.
6967
6968 @findex beginning-of-defun
6969 In earlier versions of @ccmode{}, we used to recommend putting the
6970 opening brace of a top-level construct@footnote{E.g., a function in C,
6971 or outermost class definition in C++ or Java.} into the leftmost
6972 column. Earlier still, this used to be a rigid Emacs constraint, as
6973 embodied in the @code{beginning-of-defun} function. @ccmode now
6974 caches syntactic information much better, so that the delay caused by
6975 searching for such a brace when it's not in column 0 is minimal,
6976 except perhaps when you've just moved a long way inside the file.
6977
6978 @findex defun-prompt-regexp
6979 @vindex c-Java-defun-prompt-regexp
6980 @vindex Java-defun-prompt-regexp (c-)
6981 A special note about @code{defun-prompt-regexp} in Java mode: The common
6982 style is to hang the opening braces of functions and classes on the
6983 right side of the line, and that doesn't work well with the Emacs
6984 approach. @ccmode{} comes with a constant
6985 @code{c-Java-defun-prompt-regexp} which tries to define a regular
6986 expression usable for this style, but there are problems with it. In
6987 some cases it can cause @code{beginning-of-defun} to hang@footnote{This
6988 has been observed in Emacs 19.34 and XEmacs 19.15.}. For this reason,
6989 it is not used by default, but if you feel adventurous, you can set
6990 @code{defun-prompt-regexp} to it in your mode hook. In any event,
6991 setting and relying on @code{defun-prompt-regexp} will definitely slow
6992 things down because (X)Emacs will be doing regular expression searches a
6993 lot, so you'll probably be taking a hit either way!
6994
6995 @ccmode{} maintains a cache of the opening parentheses of the blocks
6996 surrounding the point, and it adapts that cache as the point is moved
6997 around. That means that in bad cases it can take noticeable time to
6998 indent a line in a new surrounding, but after that it gets fast as long
6999 as the point isn't moved far off. The farther the point is moved, the
7000 less useful is the cache. Since editing typically is done in ``chunks''
7001 rather than on single lines far apart from each other, the cache
7002 typically gives good performance even when the code doesn't fit the
7003 Emacs approach to finding the defun starts.
7004
7005 @vindex c-enable-xemacs-performance-kludge-p
7006 @vindex enable-xemacs-performance-kludge-p (c-)
7007 XEmacs users can set the variable
7008 @code{c-enable-xemacs-performance-kludge-p} to non-@code{nil}. This
7009 tells @ccmode{} to use XEmacs-specific built-in functions which, in some
7010 circumstances, can locate the top-most opening brace much more quickly than
7011 @code{beginning-of-defun}. Preliminary testing has shown that for
7012 styles where these braces are hung (e.g., most JDK-derived Java styles),
7013 this hack can improve performance of the core syntax parsing routines
7014 from 3 to 60 times. However, for styles which @emph{do} conform to
7015 Emacs's recommended style of putting top-level braces in column zero,
7016 this hack can degrade performance by about as much. Thus this variable
7017 is set to @code{nil} by default, since the Emacs-friendly styles should
7018 be more common (and encouraged!). Note that this variable has no effect
7019 in Emacs since the necessary built-in functions don't exist (in Emacs
7020 22.1 as of this writing in February 2007).
7021
7022 Text properties are used to speed up skipping over syntactic whitespace,
7023 i.e., comments and preprocessor directives. Indenting a line after a
7024 huge macro definition can be slow the first time, but after that the
7025 text properties are in place and it should be fast (even after you've
7026 edited other parts of the file and then moved back).
7027
7028 Font locking can be a CPU hog, especially the font locking done on
7029 decoration level 3 which tries to be very accurate. Note that that
7030 level is designed to be used with a font lock support mode that only
7031 fontifies the text that's actually shown, i.e., Lazy Lock or Just-in-time
7032 Lock mode, so make sure you use one of them. Fontification of a whole
7033 buffer with some thousand lines can often take over a minute. That is
7034 a known weakness; the idea is that it never should happen.
7035
7036 The most effective way to speed up font locking is to reduce the
7037 decoration level to 2 by setting @code{font-lock-maximum-decoration}
7038 appropriately. That level is designed to be as pretty as possible
7039 without sacrificing performance. @xref{Font Locking Preliminaries}, for
7040 more info.
7041
7042
7043 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7044 @node Limitations and Known Bugs, FAQ, Performance Issues, Top
7045 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7046 @appendix Limitations and Known Bugs
7047 @cindex limitations
7048 @cindex bugs
7049 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7050
7051 @itemize @bullet
7052 @item
7053 @ccmode{} doesn't support trigraphs. (These are character sequences
7054 such as @samp{??(}, which represents @samp{[}. They date from a time
7055 when some character sets didn't have all the characters that C needs,
7056 and are now utterly obsolete.)
7057
7058 @item
7059 There is no way to apply auto newline settings (@pxref{Auto-newlines})
7060 on already typed lines. That's only a feature to ease interactive
7061 editing.
7062
7063 To generalize this issue a bit: @ccmode{} is not intended to be used as
7064 a reformatter for old code in some more or less batch-like way. With
7065 the exception of some functions like @code{c-indent-region}, it's only
7066 geared to be used interactively to edit new code. There's currently no
7067 intention to change this goal.
7068
7069 If you want to reformat old code, you're probably better off using some
7070 other tool instead, e.g., @ref{Top, , GNU indent, indent, The `indent'
7071 Manual}, which has more powerful reformatting capabilities than
7072 @ccmode{}.
7073
7074 @item
7075 The support for C++ templates (in angle brackets) is not yet complete.
7076 When a non-nested template is used in a declaration, @ccmode{} indents
7077 it and font-locks it OK@. Templates used in expressions, and nested
7078 templates do not fare so well. Sometimes a workaround is to refontify
7079 the expression after typing the closing @samp{>}.
7080
7081 @item
7082 In a @dfn{k&r region} (the part of an old-fashioned C function
7083 declaration which specifies the types of its parameters, coming
7084 between the parameter list and the opening brace), there should be at
7085 most 20 top-level parenthesis and bracket pairs. This limit has been
7086 imposed for performance reasons. If it is violated, the source file
7087 might be incorrectly indented or fontified.
7088
7089 @item
7090 On loading @ccmode{}, sometimes this error message appears:
7091
7092 @example
7093 File mode specification error: (void-variable c-font-lock-keywords-3)
7094 @end example
7095
7096 This is due to a bug in the function @code{eval-after-load} in some
7097 versions of (X)Emacs. It can manifest itself when there is a symbolic
7098 link in the path of the directory which contains (X)Emacs. As a
7099 workaround, put the following into your @file{.emacs} file, fairly
7100 early on:
7101
7102 @example
7103 (defun my-load-cc-fonts ()
7104 (require "cc-fonts"))
7105 (add-hook 'c-initialization-hook 'my-load-cc-fonts)
7106 @end example
7107 @end itemize
7108
7109 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7110 @node FAQ, Updating CC Mode, Limitations and Known Bugs, Top
7111 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7112 @appendix Frequently Asked Questions
7113 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7114
7115 @itemize @bullet
7116 @item
7117 @emph{How can I change the indent level from 4 spaces to 2 spaces?}
7118
7119 Set the variable @code{c-basic-offset}. @xref{Getting Started}.
7120
7121 @item
7122 @kindex RET
7123 @kindex C-j
7124 @emph{Why does/doesn't the @kbd{RET} key indent the new line?}
7125
7126 Emacs's convention used to be that @kbd{RET} just adds a newline, and that
7127 @kbd{C-j} adds a newline and indents it. In Emacs-24.4, this convention was
7128 reversed.
7129
7130 If you use an older Emacs and you want @kbd{RET} do this
7131 too, add this to your @code{c-initialization-hook}:
7132
7133 @example
7134 (define-key c-mode-base-map "\C-m" 'c-context-line-break)
7135 @end example
7136
7137 @xref{Getting Started}. This was a very common question.
7138
7139 @item
7140 @emph{How do I stop my code jumping all over the place when I type?}
7141
7142 Deactivate ``electric minor mode'' with @kbd{C-c C-l}. @xref{Getting
7143 Started}.
7144
7145 @item
7146 @kindex C-x h
7147 @kindex C-M-\
7148 @emph{How do I reindent the whole file?}
7149
7150 Visit the file and hit @kbd{C-x h} to mark the whole buffer. Then hit
7151 @kbd{C-M-\}. @xref{Indentation Commands}.
7152
7153 @item
7154 @kindex C-M-q
7155 @kindex C-M-u
7156 @emph{How do I reindent the current block?}
7157
7158 First move to the brace which opens the block with @kbd{C-M-u}, then
7159 reindent that expression with @kbd{C-M-q}. @xref{Indentation
7160 Commands}.
7161
7162 @item
7163 @emph{I put @code{(c-set-offset 'substatement-open 0)} in my
7164 @file{.emacs} file but I get an error saying that @code{c-set-offset}'s
7165 function definition is void. What's wrong?}
7166
7167 This means that @ccmode{} hasn't yet been loaded into your Emacs
7168 session by the time the @code{c-set-offset} call is reached, most
7169 likely because @ccmode{} is being autoloaded. Instead of putting the
7170 @code{c-set-offset} line in your top-level @file{.emacs} file, put it
7171 in your @code{c-initialization-hook} (@pxref{CC Hooks}), or simply
7172 modify @code{c-offsets-alist} directly:
7173
7174 @example
7175 (setq c-offsets-alist '((substatement-open . 0)))
7176 @end example
7177
7178 @item
7179 @cindex open paren in column zero
7180 @emph{I have an open paren character at column zero inside a comment or
7181 multiline string literal, and it causes the fontification and/or
7182 indentation to go haywire. What gives?}
7183
7184 It's due to the ad-hoc rule in (X)Emacs that such open parens always
7185 start defuns (which translates to functions, classes, namespaces or any
7186 other top-level block constructs in the @ccmode{} languages).
7187 @ifset XEMACS
7188 @xref{Defuns,,, xemacs, XEmacs User's Manual}, for details.
7189 @end ifset
7190 @ifclear XEMACS
7191 @xref{Left Margin Paren,,, emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}, for details
7192 (@xref{Defuns,,, emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}, in the Emacs 20 manual).
7193 @end ifclear
7194
7195 This heuristic is built into the core syntax analysis routines in
7196 (X)Emacs, so it's not really a @ccmode{} issue. However, in Emacs
7197 21.1 it became possible to turn it off@footnote{Using the variable
7198 @code{open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start}.} and @ccmode{} does so
7199 there since it's got its own system to keep track of blocks.
7200
7201 @end itemize
7202
7203
7204 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7205 @node Updating CC Mode, Mailing Lists and Bug Reports, FAQ, Top
7206 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7207 @appendix Getting the Latest CC Mode Release
7208 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7209
7210 @ccmode{} has been standard with all versions of Emacs since 19.34 and
7211 of XEmacs since 19.16.
7212
7213 @cindex web site
7214 Due to release schedule skew, it is likely that all of these Emacsen
7215 have old versions of @ccmode{} and so should be upgraded. Access to the
7216 @ccmode{} source code, as well as more detailed information on Emacsen
7217 compatibility, etc.@: are all available on the web site:
7218
7219 @quotation
7220 @uref{http://cc-mode.sourceforge.net/}
7221 @end quotation
7222
7223
7224 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7225 @node Mailing Lists and Bug Reports, GNU Free Documentation License, Updating CC Mode, Top
7226 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7227 @appendix Mailing Lists and Submitting Bug Reports
7228 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7229
7230 @kindex C-c C-b
7231 @findex c-submit-bug-report
7232 @findex submit-bug-report (c-)
7233 To report bugs, use the @kbd{C-c C-b} (bound to
7234 @code{c-submit-bug-report}) command. This provides vital information
7235 we need to reproduce your problem. Make sure you include a concise,
7236 but complete code example. Please try to boil your example down to
7237 just the essential code needed to reproduce the problem, and include
7238 an exact recipe of steps needed to expose the bug. Be especially sure
7239 to include any code that appears @emph{before} your bug example, if
7240 you think it might affect our ability to reproduce it.
7241
7242 Please try to produce the problem in an Emacs instance without any
7243 customizations loaded (i.e., start it with the @samp{-q --no-site-file}
7244 arguments). If it works correctly there, the problem might be caused
7245 by faulty customizations in either your own or your site
7246 configuration. In that case, we'd appreciate it if you isolate the
7247 Emacs Lisp code that triggers the bug and include it in your report.
7248
7249 @cindex bug report mailing list
7250 Reporting a bug using @code{c-submit-bug-report} files it in
7251 the GNU Bug Tracker at @url{http://debbugs.gnu.org}, then sends it on
7252 to @email{bug-cc-mode@@gnu.org}. You can also send reports, other
7253 questions, and suggestions (kudos?@: @t{;-)} to that address. It's a
7254 mailing list which you can join or browse an archive of; see the web site at
7255 @uref{http://cc-mode.sourceforge.net/} for further details.
7256
7257 @cindex announcement mailing list
7258 If you want to get announcements of new @ccmode{} releases, send the
7259 word @emph{subscribe} in the body of a message to
7260 @email{cc-mode-announce-request@@lists.sourceforge.net}. It's possible
7261 to subscribe from the web site too. Announcements will also be posted
7262 to the Usenet newsgroups @code{gnu.emacs.sources}, @code{comp.emacs},
7263 @code{comp.emacs.xemacs}, @code{comp.lang.c}, @code{comp.lang.c++},
7264 @code{comp.lang.objective-c}, @code{comp.lang.java.softwaretools},
7265 @code{comp.lang.idl}, and @code{comp.lang.awk}.
7266 @c There is no newsgroup for Pike. :-(
7267
7268
7269 @node GNU Free Documentation License, Command and Function Index, Mailing Lists and Bug Reports, Top
7270 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
7271 @include doclicense.texi
7272
7273
7274 @c Removed the tentative node "Mode Initialization" from here, 2005/8/27.
7275 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7276 @node Command and Function Index, Variable Index, GNU Free Documentation License, Top
7277 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7278 @unnumbered Command and Function Index
7279 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7280
7281 Since most @ccmode{} commands are prepended with the string
7282 @samp{c-}, each appears under its @code{c-@var{thing}} name and its
7283 @code{@var{thing} (c-)} name.
7284 @iftex
7285 @sp 2
7286 @end iftex
7287 @printindex fn
7288
7289
7290 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7291 @node Variable Index, Concept and Key Index, Command and Function Index, Top
7292 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7293 @unnumbered Variable Index
7294 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7295
7296 Since most @ccmode{} variables are prepended with the string
7297 @samp{c-}, each appears under its @code{c-@var{thing}} name and its
7298 @code{@var{thing} (c-)} name.
7299 @iftex
7300 @sp 2
7301 @end iftex
7302 @printindex vr
7303
7304
7305 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7306 @node Concept and Key Index, , Variable Index, Top
7307 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7308 @unnumbered Concept and Key Index
7309 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7310
7311 @printindex cp
7312
7313
7314 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7315 @comment Epilogue.
7316 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7317
7318 @bye